Sample Text

Sample Text
Blackboard Academic Suite™
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Learning System™
Blackboard Community System™
Blackboard Learning System—Basic Edition
Application Pack 3 (Release 6.3)
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual (Doc #163002)
Publication Date: June 28, 2005
Worldwide Headquarters
International Headquarters
Blackboard Inc.
Blackboard International B.V.
1899 L Street, NW, 5th Floor
Keizersgracht 62/64
Washington, DC 20036-3861 USA
1015 CS Amsterdam
The Netherlands
800-424-9299 toll free US & Canada
+1-202-463-4860 telephone
+31 20 5206884 (NL) telephone
+1-202-463-4863 facsimile
+31 20 5206885 (NL) facsimile
www.blackboard.com
global.blackboard.com
Blackboard, the Blackboard logo, Blackboard e-Education Suite, Blackboard Learning System, Blackboard Learning
System ML, Blackboard Community System, Blackboard Transaction System, Building Blocks, and Bringing Education
Online are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Blackboard Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Intel
and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Sun, Solaris, UltraSPARC, and Java are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Oracle is a
registered trademark of Oracle Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Red Hat is a registered trademark
of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the
United States and/or other countries. Apache is a trademark of The Apache Software Foundation in the United States
and/or other countries. Macromedia, Authorware and Shockwave are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Real Player and Real Audio Movie are trademarks of
RealNetworks in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe and Acrobat Reader are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Macintosh and QuickTime are
registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. WordPerfect is a registered
trademark of Corel Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Crystal Reports is a trademark of Crystal
Decisions in the United States and/or other countries. WebEQ is a trademark of Design Science, Inc. in the United States
and/or other countries. JSpell is a trademark of The Solution Café in the United States and/or other countries. Other
product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. Patents pending.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. All rights reserved. Made and printed in the USA.
No part of the contents of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the written
permission of the publisher, Blackboard Inc.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 2 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
About the Blackboard Academic Suite (Release 6.3) Instructor Manual
9
Chapter 1 - Welcome to the Blackboard Academic Suite
10
Courses
Course Menu
Course Map
Control Panel
Course Roles
11
12
14
16
17
Chapter 2—Working in the Blackboard Academic Suite
20
Navigation
Locales
Quick Edit
Searching for Users and Courses
Entering Text
Text Box Editors
Selecting Dates
HTML Tips
Link to File
Insert Multimedia File
About Spell Check
Using Spell Check
Math and Science Notation Tool – WebEQ Equation Editor
Adding and Editing Equations
21
22
24
25
26
27
34
35
38
39
42
43
45
46
Chapter 3 - Course Creation Wizard
47
Course Creation Wizard - Course Information
Course Creation Wizard - Course Materials
Course Creation Wizard - Course Design
Course Creation Wizard - Course Menu
Course Creation Wizard – Availability and Duration
Course Creation Wizard - Course Enrollment
49
50
51
53
54
56
Chapter 4 - Content
57
Content Areas
Course Content
Items
File Attachments
Add SCORM, IMS, and NLN Content
Folders
Content Metadata
External Links
Course Link
59
60
63
66
68
72
73
75
76
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 3 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Learning Units
Tests
Test Options
Assignments
Tool Linking
Copy and Move Content
The Open Standards Content Player
Syllabus
Adaptive Release
Adaptive Release Functions
Adaptive Release Criteria
Review Status
User Progress
Performance Dashboard
Statistics Tracking
77
78
80
84
85
86
87
90
93
95
98
104
106
107
109
Chapter 5—Course Tools
111
Course Announcements
Staff Information
Add or Modify Profile
Calendar
Add or Modify Calendar Event
Calendar Quick Jump
Tasks
Add or Modify Task
Send Email
Send Email to All Users
Digital Drop Box
Add File to the Digital Drop Box
Send File from the Digital Drop Box
Glossary Manager
Add Glossary Term
Download Glossary
Upload Glossary
Messages
112
113
114
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
131
Chapter 6—Communication
132
Discussion Board
Add or Modify Forum
Forums
Post and Reply
Forum Archives
Add Archive
Modify Archive
Collaboration Tools
Collaboration Sessions
Create/Modify Collaboration Session
133
134
136
138
139
140
141
142
144
146
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 4 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Virtual Classroom
Menu Bar
Classroom Tool box
Whiteboard
Group Browser
Content Map
Ask Question
Question Inbox
Chat
Private Messages
User Information
Record Menu
Session Archives
Archive Properties
147
148
149
150
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
Chapter 7—Course Options
162
Manage Course Menu
Add New Content Area
Add New Tool Area
Add New Course Link
Add External Link
Course Design
Course Banner
Manage Tools
Enable Blackboard Tools
Enable Building Blocks Tools
Enable Content Types
163
164
165
166
167
168
170
171
172
173
174
Chapter 8—Course Settings
175
Course Name and Description
Course Availability
Guest Access
Observer Access
Course Duration
Enrollment Options
Categorize Course
Set Course Entry Point
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
Chapter 9—Copy, Import, Archive and Recycle
184
Recycle Course
Copy Course
Copy Course Materials into a New Course
Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course
Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy)
Import Package
Export Course
Archive Course
185
186
187
190
194
195
198
200
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 5 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Chapter 10—Course Cartridges
201
Import Course Cartridge
About Chalk Titles
Manage Chalk Titles
202
204
206
Chapter 11—User Management
207
List/Modify Users
Change Password
Create User and Modify User
Batch Create Users for Course Page
Enroll User
Remove Users from the Course
Manage Groups
Add Group / Group Properties
Modify Group
Add Users to Group
List Users in Group
Remove Users from Group
208
209
210
213
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
Chapter 12 – Assessment
223
Test Manager
How to Create or Modify a Test
Test Info
Test Canvas
Test Creation Settings
Question Completion Status
Question Metadata
Multiple Choice Questions
True/False Questions
Multiple Choice Questions
Fill in the Blank Questions
Multiple Answer Questions
Matching Questions
Ordering Questions
Essay Questions
Calculated Formula Questions
Calculated Numeric Response Questions
File Response Questions
Hot Spot Questions
Fill In Multiple Blanks Questions
Jumbled Sentence Questions
Opinion Scale/Likert Questions
Short Answer Questions
Either/Or Questions
Quiz Bowl Questions
Add/Modify Random Block
225
226
227
228
230
232
233
234
236
238
240
242
244
247
249
250
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 6 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Upload Questions
Search Pools and Assessments
Survey Manager
Pool Manager
Pool Import
262
265
267
268
270
Chapter 13 – Gradebook
271
Gradebook
Add/Modify Gradebook Item
Manage Items
Spreadsheet Settings
Manage Categories
Create/Modify Item Category
Manage Display Options
Create/Modify Grade Display Options
Weight Grades
Calculating Total and Weighted Total in the Gradebook
Download Gradebook
Upload Gradebook
Choose Column to Import: Items
Choose Column to Import: Students
Modify Grade: Assessment
Grade Assessment
Item Options: Tests and Surveys
View Item Grades
View Item Detail
Assessment Stats
Download Assessment Results
Modify Grades: Assignment
Grade Assignment
Item Options: Assignments
Download Assignment
Delete Assignment Files
User Options
View User Information
View User Grades
View User Detail
Gradebook Views
View Grades by Gradebook Item
View Grades by User
Course Statistics
273
275
277
278
279
280
281
283
284
286
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
303
304
306
307
308
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
Top of FormChapter 14 – Assistance
318
Chapter 15 - Organizing and Managing Content
319
Organize Content in Folders
Organize Folder Permissions
320
322
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 7 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Tools for sharing and finding content
Organize Course folders
323
325
Chapter 16—Using Content System Content
327
Add Content System Items to a Course
Add Portfolios to a Course
Course Link Checker
Copy Files to the Content Collection
Content System Items during Export/Import and Archive/Restore
Course Copy and Content System Items
328
330
332
335
339
340
Chapter 17 - Using Library content
341
Library Areas
eReserve folders
Add Library Content to Courses
342
343
344
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 8 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ABOUT THE BLACKBOARD ACADEMIC SUITE (RELEASE 6.3) INSTRUCTOR MANUAL
Overview
The Instructor Manual provides detailed information about building and managing courses on the
Blackboard Learning System. The Blackboard Community System offers the same set of functions
and features for managing an Organization.
How the manual is organized
The Blackboard Academic Suite Instructor Manual begins by reviewing the teaching and learning
environment for Instructors. The bulk of the manual details the functions available to Instructors
through the Control Panel.
Manual Conventions
To make this manual easier to use a number of conventions have been put in place.
S YMBOL
D ESCRIPTION
Bold type
A button or field name.
Courier font
Italics in a title
[r]
Text that users should type.
Additional information in a title that may not be included on the
Web page.
Required field
Using this manual
This manual should be read as a reference guide. Do not read this manual from cover to cover.
Manual Updates
Please note that this manual is updated periodically. Check the Date of Last Revision at the
beginning of the manual to ensure that it is the most recent copy.
The HTML version is available by clicking Online Admin Manual from the Control Panel and at
http://www.blackboard.com/products/services/support. This site also includes the manual in PDF
format.
To report any comments or suggestions regarding this manual, please contact Blackboard Support.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 9 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
CHAPTER 1 - WELCOME TO THE BLACKBOARD ACADEMIC SUITE
Introduction
The following are some things to keep in mind when using the Blackboard Academic Suite:
Certain tools may not be documented.
System Administrators have the ability to disable certain tools within the application. If you
encounter tools that you are unable to access contact your System Administrator.
The openness of the Blackboard Academic Suite allows Instructors and Administrators to be very
creative. The names for items in the Blackboard Academic Suite may differ from those in the
documentation.
Building Blocks allows institutions to integrate external applications, tools, content, and services
into the Blackboard Academic Suite.
The Blackboard environment
The Blackboard environment includes a header frame with images and buttons customized by the
System Administrator and tabs that navigate to different areas. Clicking on a tab will open that area
in the content frame.
Header frame
The header frame contains navigation buttons that allow the user to access the institution home
page, access the help, and logout.
Tabs
Blackboard Learning System and Blackboard Learning System–Basic Edition include two common
tabs for users:
•
My Institution: The My Institution tab contains tools and information specific to each
user’s preferences. Tools and information are contained in modules. Users can add and
remove modules from their My Institution tab. The System Administrator may restrict
access to or require specific modules.
•
Courses: Users click on a link from the Courses tab to access a Course.
•
Users also have access to the following tabs with the Blackboard Community System:
•
Community: The Community tab lists Organizations specific to each user, the
Organization Catalog for the institution, and institution Discussion Boards. Users click on a
link from the Community tab to access an Organization.
•
Services: The Services tab contains links to other institutional offerings outside of the
Blackboard Learning System. The links are set by the System Administrator.
In addition, the Blackboard Community System enables the institution to create custom tabs and
present different tabs to users based on Institution Roles.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 10 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSES
Overview
Courses contain content and tools for teaching and learning. The Instructor assigned to a Course
oversees the course through the Control Panel. While the Instructor has control over the Course,
the Administrator can set overrides that restrict or require course areas and tools.
A Course consists of the Course Menu and a content frame. The Course Menu links users to
content and tools. The content frame displays content and tools.
Organization Web Sites
Organization Web sites function in the same way as Courses. The Organization Manager uses the
same Control Panel that appears in Courses to provide an online environment for the organization.
Organizations are only available with the Blackboard Community System.
Functions
The table below includes information on the components of a Course. The names of the areas can
be changed by the Instructor or the System Administrator.
A RE A
D ESCRIPTION
Announcements
Announcements post timely information critical to course
success. Click Announcements from the Course Menu to
view Announcements.
Staff Information
Staff Information provides background and
information on Instructors and Teaching Assistants.
Course areas
Course areas can contain a wide-range of content items
including: Assessments, Assignments, Learning Units, and
multimedia files.
Communication
The Communication area allows users to:
contact
• send and receive messages
• open Discussion Boards
• enter the Virtual Classroom
• view roster
• view Group pages
External Links
External Links connect users to learning materials outside of
the Blackboard Academic Suite.
Tools
Tools that can be used in the Course. These include: Digital
Drop Box, Edit Home Page, Personal Information, Calendar,
View Grades, Student Manual, Tasks, The Electric
Blackboard®, and Address Book.
Course Map
Navigate through a collapsible tree directory.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 11 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE MENU
About the Course Menu
The Course Menu appears on the left side of a course and contains links to materials and tools
within the course. The Instructor can customize the appearance of the Course Menu and the
content and tools available to users.
Two views may be made available to users; if both views are available users may toggle between
them:
•
Quick View – Displays top-level of course materials. Links may be displayed as buttons or
text.
•
Detail View – Displays course materials as seen in the Course Map. This view expands to
show the hierarchy of course navigation.
A Tools Panel appears as part of the Course Menu. This box may contain links to the Course Map,
Communication tools and/or Course Tools. Links to tools may also be added to the main part of the
Course Menu so they appear in the Detail View or the Course Map.
The size of the Course Menu frame may be adjusted. Hold the mouse over the border that marks
the right side of the Course Menu, an arrow pointer appears. Use the mouse to drag this border
and expand or contract the frame.
Information about when the Course Menu was last refreshed is also available in the Course Menu.
Hold the mouse over the Refresh icon to view the date and time the menu was last refreshed. In
the Detail View the date and time information appears at the bottom.
View new Content
When content is added to the Course Menu or the Course Map it takes 20 minutes for it to cache;
this means that new content in the Course Menu and Course Map does not appear for 20 minutes.
To view content within the first 20 minutes it has been added click Refresh.
Set up Menu display options
The Instructor can make the Quick View and/or the Detail View available within a course. Follow
the steps below to change the view:
1.
Select Course Design on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage on the Course Design page.
3.
Select a default view for the Course Menu.
NOTE: Administrators control the default of the Course Menu for the entire
system. This does not limit the Instructors ability to make changes within their
courses; it only dictates the appearance of the default Course Menu.
NOTE: The Course Map may appear with a different color scheme when
accessed from Quick View. When Quick View uses text links (not buttons) the
color of the links may be modified. If the color is modified, the color of items in
the Course Map will appear the same as the text links.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 12 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Set up Tool box display
The Tools Panel may be set to display links to Course Tools, Communication tools, and/or the
Course Map. The display of the Tools Panel is managed separately for the Detail View and the
Quick View. This allows Instructors to set up the Tools Panel differently in the two separate views.
Follow the steps below to set up the Tools Panel display for the Quick View:
1.
Select Course Design on the Control Panel
2.
Select Manage Tool Panel on the Course Design page.
3.
Select Quick View Tool Panel Options or Detail View Tool Panel Options on the
Manage Tool Panel page.
4.
Select which links to display in the box and enter a name to appear in the header. If no
options are selected, the Tools Panel does not appear in the Course Menu. If Header
Name is left blank, no header appears in the Tools panel. The background and text color
for the header may also be selected.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 13 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE MAP
About the Course Map
The Course Map is a collapsible tree directory that is used for navigation within a course. The
Course Map may be viewed from the Course menu, Collaboration Sessions, the Performance
Dashboard and as a selection window.
Information about when the Course Map was last refreshed is also available at the bottom of the
map.
View the Course Map from the Course Menu
The Course Map may be opened from the Display View and the Quick View of the Course Menu.
Select Course Map in the Tools Panel on the Course Menu to open the Course Map. All available
content and tools appear within the Course Map.
When the Course Map is viewed from the Course Menu, the Instructor views the course content as
a user. For example, if an item is made available to a group through an Adaptive Release rule, and
the Instructor is not part of the Group, the item will not be visible to the Instructor through the
Course Map.
View the Course Map from the Performance Dashboard
When the Course Map is viewed from the Performance Dashboard, the availability of items, tools,
and Review Status for the specific user is displayed.
Select the icon in the Adaptive Release column to view the Course Map for a specific user. The
availability of each item and the Review Status for the user selected is indicated.
This following table includes a description of the icons used in the Performance Dashboard:
A D APTIVE R ELEASE
AND
R EVIEW S TATUS
ICONS :
Visible – this item is visible to that course user.
Invisible – this item is not visible to that course user.
Reviewed – this item has been marked as Reviewed by the course user.
Not Reviewed – this item is displayed as Mark Reviewed to the course user.
View the Content Map from a Virtual Classroom
The Content Map is similar to the Course Map, except the tree directory only displays available
Content Areas; it does not allow users to navigate to other course areas, such as tools. To open
the Content Map, select Content Map in the Classroom Tool box of a Virtual Classroom.
Use the Course Map as a selection window
Course areas and items may be linked to from different pages within a course, such as the Add
Announcement page and Add Course Link page. This selection process uses the Course Map,
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 14 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
accessed by selecting the Browse button. The Course Map, accessed from these pages, displays
all content items within a course. Click a link in the Course Map to select an item or tool.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 15 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CONTROL PANEL
Overview
All course administration is done through the Control Panel. This area is only available to users
with one of the following defined course roles:
•
Instructor
•
Teaching Assistant
•
Grader
•
System Administrator
Find the Control Panel
1.
Open a course.
2.
Click Control Panel on the Course Menu.
Functions
The Control Panel is comprised of six areas:
P ART
F UNCTION
Content Areas
Provides the tools necessary to add text, files, and information into
a course.
Course Tools
Contains the communication tools to send email, create tasks, and
work with groups.
Course Options
Contains security and customization options.
User Management
Provides tools to manage users and enrollments.
Assessment
Provides tools for building Assessments, recording grades, and
tracking user activity.
Support
Offers support contacts and online documentation.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 16 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE ROLES
Overview
Course Roles control access to the content and tools within a course. Each user is assigned a role
for each Course in which they participate. For example, a User with a role of Teaching Assistant in
one Course can have a role of Student in another Course.
The Course Role is set when a User is enrolled. It can also be modified after enrollment from the
Control Panel.
•
Course Roles include:
•
Course Builder
•
Grader
•
Guest
•
Instructor
•
Student
•
Teacher’s Assistant
NOTE: Administrators may modify the privileges associated with different
Course Roles. Therefore, all of the privileges listed may not apply.
Administrators also have the option to change the names of Course Roles.
Course Builder
The Course Builder role has access to most areas of the Control Panel. This role is appropriate for
a user to manage the course without having access to Student grades.
NOTE: A Course Builder can still access the course if the course is
unavailable to Students. A Course Builder cannot remove an Instructor
from a Course.
Course Builders have access to the following areas of the Control Panel:
•
*Course Information
•
Settings
•
*Course Documents
•
Import Course Cartridge
•
*Assignments
•
Import Package
•
*External Links
•
*Resources
•
*Announcements
•
Course Copy
•
*Course Calendar
•
Export Course
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 17 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
•
*Staff Information
•
List / Modify Users
•
*Tasks
•
Create User
•
*Discussion Boards
•
Batch Create Users for
Course
•
*Send Email
•
Enroll User
•
*Collaboration
•
Remove Users from the
Course
•
*Digital Drop Box
•
*Manage Groups
•
Manage
Menu
•
*Test Manager
•
Archive Course
•
*Survey Manager
•
Recycle Course
•
*Pool Manager
•
*Manage Tools
•
Course
* Settings marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be modified by the Administrator. These privileges will
always be available for this Course Role.
Grader
A Grader assists the Instructor in the creation, management, delivery, and grading of Assessments.
A Grader also assists the Instructor with managing the Gradebook.
NOTE: A Grader cannot access a course if it is unavailable to Students.
Graders have access to the following areas of the Control Panel:
•
*Announcements
•
*Survey Manager
•
*Course Calendar
•
*Pool Manager
•
*Digital Drop Box
•
*Gradebook
•
List/Modify Users –
may not modify
content
•
*Gradebook Views
•
*Test Manager
•
*Course Statistics
* Settings marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be modified by the Administrator. These privileges will
always be available for this Course Role.
Guest
Users with the role of Guest have no access to the Control Panel. Areas within the course can be
made available to Guests.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 18 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
Visitors such as prospective students, alumni or parents may be given the role of Guest.
Instructor
Instructors have access to all areas in the Control Panel. This role is generally given to those
developing, teaching or facilitating the class. Instructors may still access a course that is
unavailable to Students.
Administrators may limit access to the following features:
•
List / Modify Users
•
Course Copy
•
Create User
•
Recycle Course
•
Batch
Create
Users for Course
•
Import Course Cartridge
•
Remove Users from
the Course
•
Export Course
•
•
Archive Course
Enroll User
•
•
Manage Course Menu
Settings
Student
Student is the default Course Role. Students have no access to any areas on the Control Panel.
Teaching Assistant
Teaching Assistants have access to most features. If the course is unavailable to Students,
Teaching Assistants may still access the course. Teaching Assistants are not listed in the Course
Catalog listing for the course.
NOTE: A Teaching Assistant cannot remove an Instructor from a course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 19 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 2—WORKING IN THE BLACKBOARD ACADEMIC SUITE
Overview
This chapter discusses how to navigate and enter text in the Blackboard Academic Suite.
In this chapter
This chapter includes the following topics.
T OPIC
D ESCRIPTION
Navigation
Describes how to move throughout the Blackboard Academic
Suite.
Locales
Explains how locales are used to present information using
different languages and cultural norms.
Quick Edit
Explains how to edit a course from within the view.
Searching for Users
and Courses
Explains how to locate records in the system.
Entering Text
Describes how to input information.
Text Box Editors
Describes how to Input information using the Text Box Editor.
Link to File
Explains how to add a link to a file.
Insert
File
Explains how to add a multimedia file.
Multimedia
About Spell Check
Describes the Spell Check feature.
Using Spell Check
Explains how to use the Spell Check feature.
Math and Science
Notation Tool
Describes the Math and Science Notation Tool – WebEQ Editor.
Adding and Editing
Equations
Explains how to add and modify equations on the Math and
Science Notation Tool.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 20 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
NAVIGATION
Overview
Only the material in the content frame changes when moving to a new area or page. The tabs and
header frame are always available for quick access to those navigation features.
N AVIG ATION T OOL
D ESCRIPTION
Tab
Click a tab to open it.
Button
Click a button to navigate to a page within
the Blackboard Academic Suite. Some
buttons also lead to areas outside of the
Blackboard Academic Suite. Buttons also
execute functions.
Link
Click a hypertext link to access another
Web page within the Blackboard
Academic Suite. Links can also open Web
sites outside of the Blackboard Academic
Suite.
Path
Click one of the hypertext links that appear
in the navigation path to access that page.
The navigation path appears at the top of
pages to return to the previous page that
led to the current page.
Linking to a Course
To link to a Course, copy the URL from the address bar in the Web. Links to Courses can be
posted inside or outside the Blackboard Academic Suite. Users will be prompted for authorization
before accessing the Course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 21 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
LOCALES
About Locales
Locales present the Blackboard Academic Suite using language and cultural norms matched to
different audiences. Locales are defined at the system level, the course or organization level, and
finally at the user level.
At the system level, the Administrator defines one locale as the system default. This is the locale
that appears when no other locales are specified at the course level or at the user level.
At the course level, the Instructor can set a locale and enforce it. Enforcing a locale means that all
users will see that locale. If the locale is not enforced, and a user has a preferred locale associated
with their account, the user’s locale will override the course locale.
At the user level, individuals may select their preferred locale.
NOTE: Customized names, such as changing the name of a Content Area, are
not changed with the locale. These values stay the same through all locales. The
default names in the system are translated and appear differently in each locale.
Set a Locale for a Course
Follow these steps to set a locale for a course.
1.
Click Settings from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Set Locale.
3.
Select a Locale from the drop-down list.
4.
Click Enforce Locale to always display this course in the selected locale.
5.
Click Submit.
If a locale is not chosen for a course the course will display in the user’s preferred locale or, if the
user has not set a preferred locale, in the system default locale.
Course Areas not Impacted by Locale Selections
For the most part, the Control Panel appears in the selected locale of a course; it does not appear
in the locale selected for the user. In a few spots within a course, the page will display using the
system default or the user’s preferred locale rather than the course locale. The following pages will
not display in the selected course locale:
•
Control Panel > Course Information > Modify Item, Copy Item, Add Item, Remove Item
•
Control Panel > Copy Files to CS
•
Control Panel > Discussion Board > Add Forum
•
Control Panel > Announcements > Confirmation receipt.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 22 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Spell Check and Locales
The Spell Check tool supports American English, Great Britain English, French, and Spanish. The
Spell Check tool will not work with other locales. If Spell Check does not recognize the locale it will
use a supported dictionary.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 23 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
QUICK EDIT
Overview
Quick Edit allows Instructors to make changes to content from within the course view instead of
navigating through the Control Panel to edit content. When an Instructor is viewing the course
through the Student view, they may use this shortcut to edit course content, without going through
the Control Panel. Quick Edit controls appear in the navigation bar in each Course area and any
subfolders. System Administrators may disable this feature.
NOTE: The Edit View link is displayed to users with a role of Instructor, TA,
Course Builder, or System Administrator. Due to the size of the content
editing pages, this method of editing is not recommended with an 800x600
screen resolution.
Functions
Select Edit View to open and edit the Course area or Content Item. A Display View link appears in
the top right corner of the Control Panel view of the content page. Select Display View to go back
to the course display view of the same content page. Instructors may use Edit View and Display
View to toggle back and forth between the edit view and display view of course content.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 24 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
SEARCHING FOR USERS AND COURSES
Overview
There are several areas in the Blackboard Academic Suite where users can search for other users.
User search options
The table below details the available user search options. All options are not available in all search
boxes.
TO . . .
THEN
search for a user using last
name or Username
...
1. Select the Search tab.
2. Enter either a last name or a Username.
3. Select either the Last Name or Username option.
All matching entries will be displayed.
search for a group of last
names or Usernames that
start with a particular letter or
number
1. Select the A-Z, 0-9 tab.
search using a value found in
the user’s name
1. Select the Advanced tab.
2. Click on the first letter of the last name or on the
first number of the Username. All matching
entries will be displayed.
2. Enter a value in the Containing field.
3. The search will return all users with that value in
their Username.
4. Click the check boxes and select values from the
drop-down list to narrow the search.
list all users
1. Select the tab.
2. Click List All to list all the names enrolled. All
entries will be displayed.
Course search options
The following options are available when searching for a course:
•
Search: The search parameters on this tab can be used separately or in tandem to further
narrow the list generated. To use this tab: Click the Course ID, Instructor, or
Title/Description option. Enter a value in the field. Then click the All Courses, Month, or
Day option to define the list based on when the courses where created. The search
function will create a list of courses with that value created in the time selected.
•
A-Z, 0-9: Click the letter or number that represents the first character of a Course ID. A list
of all courses with an ID that begins with that character will appear.
•
List All: Click List All to view all the courses on the system.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 25 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ENTERING TEXT
Overview
By default, Blackboard Academic Suite will format text to 12-point, left-justified Arial. Any other
formatting must be done with HTML tags or using the Text Box Editor.
Text box options
The following options are available in most text entry boxes in the Blackboard Learning System:
F ORM AT O PTION
B EHAVIOR
Smart Text
Automatically recognizes a link entered in the text box. Smart text
recognizes the ENTER key as a paragraph tag and accepts HTML
tags as well. Smart Text will also prompt to load images if an image
source tag appears.
Web addresses entered as URLs are
converted to links. The URL must begin with "http://" and there
must be a space before the "http://" to distinguish it from the
previous word.
If an image tag, <IMG>, is entered in Smart Text,
the Blackboard Academic Suite will automatically prompt you to
upload the image.
Plain Text
Displays text as it is written in the text area. Plain text does not
render HTML code. HTML code will appear as text.
HTML
Displays text as coded by the user using Hypertext Mark-up
Language (HTML) tags.
NOTE: The Smart Text and Plain Text options are only available if the
Administrator has turned off the Text Box Editor or if the user does not
have a Windows Operating System and Internet Explorer Version 5.x or a
later.
It is not possible to display a file in a content item and add a Smart Text or Plain Text description.
Add the description as a separate content item and then add display the file in the next content
item.
File names
The characters a-z, 0-9, period ‘.’ and underscore ‘_’ are acceptable in file names. Accented
characters are not supported. Accented characters and spaces will be converted to underscores
‘_’ in the name of the uploaded file. Special characters are not supported in file names.
Special Characters
Special characters, such as %&#<>=+ as well as spaces, should not be used when defining
attributes such as a Course ID or a Username. Use a-z, 0-9, and underscore when naming
attributes.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 26 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
TEXT BOX EDITORS
About the Text Box Editor
Smart text, Plain text, or HTML may be used in the Text Box Editor. Options at the bottom of the
box allow the user to switch format at anytime.
Smart text should be used if the intent is to display the text in the exact way that it is typed in. Line
breaks, tabbing, and other keyboard formatting will be retained with Smart text.
Plain text strips any formatting from the text, except for line breaks. The result is completely
unformatted text. This may be useful if the user needs to do a lot of copy and pasting of the
content, or if the intent is to display code information. For example, if the user wants to show how to
write something in HTML, Plain text should be used to retain the HTML tags in the content. Plain
text does not work with MathML or the equation editor. Changing a text box that includes a
mathematical formula to Plain text will make the formula unreadable.
The HTML option should be used if the user knows HTML and opts to type HTML tags into the Text
Box Editor. The result will be content formatted by the HTML tags used.
Preview shows the user how the formatted text will appear when rendered in the browser. Features
that appear in the Text Box Editor may include WebEQ, MathML, and SpellCheck.
About the Visual Text Box Editor
The Visual Text Box Editor has three rows of buttons. The first row is required and may not be
collapsed. The second and third rows may be collapsed with the arrows to the left of the row.
When using the Blackboard Content System, the third row options of the Visual
Text Box Editor provide a Browse to Content Collection field. The Visual Text
Box Editor allows the user to create content that includes links to items in their
Content Collection.
F IRST
ROW BASIC ACTIONS
Font Style
Select a style for the text. The options correspond to standard HTML
Style types.
Font size
Select the size of the text.
Font
Select the font.
Bold
Make selected text bold.
Italics
Make selected text italics.
Underline
Underline the selected text.
Align left
Align text to the left.
Align Center
Align text in the center.
Align Right
Align text to the right.
Ordered list
Create a numbered list or add a numbered list item.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 27 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IRST
ROW BASIC ACTIONS
Unordered list
Create a bulleted list or add a bullet list item.
Decrease Indent
Move text left.
Increase Indent
Move text right.
S ECOND R OW A DDITIONAL B ASIC A CTIONS
Find
Search for a word or phrase in the text area.
Spell Check
Select the ABC checkmark to open Spell Check.
Cut
Cut the selected items.
Copy
Copy the selected items.
Paste
Paste copied or cut content.
Undo
Select the circular arrow pointing to the left to undo the previous
action.
Redo
Select the circular arrow pointing to the right to redo the previous
action.
Hyperlink
Add a hyperlink. Types include: file, ftp, gopher, http, https, mailto,
news, telnet, and wais.
Create Table
Add a table.
Horizontal Line
Add a line.
Background Color
Add a highlight color to the selected text.
Text Color
Specify the color of the text.
WebEQ Editor
Open the WebEQ Equation Editor icon (x2) to add an equation.
Equations cannot be added to a cell in a table. Instead, create the
equation outside the table and then cut and paste the equation into
the cell.
MathML Editor
Open the MathML Equation Editor icon (√x ) to add an equation.
HTML View
View the HTML code that is generated by the Visual Text Box
Editor. Users may also edit the HTML in this view. If HTML is added
or changed in this view, click Submit to view the change in the
Visual Text Box Editor.
Preview
Preview the content as it will be seen by end users.
Help
Select the question mark to launch the Help page.
The following table includes a description of some options specific to each type of file attachment.
T HIRD
ROW FILE ATTACHMENT ACTIONS AND SPECIAL OPTIONS
Attach file
Add a file to the text area. The Insert Link to File page will appear.
• Browse: select a file from the local machine
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 28 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
T HIRD
ROW FILE ATTACHMENT ACTIONS AND SPECIAL OPTIONS
• Link to Content Collection: select an item or folder from the
Content Collection
• Specify Source URL: provide a URL where the item is
located.
• Name of link to file: providing a descriptive name of the
content is helpful for the user. This allows the user to read
the link in context, rather than simply read the name of the
file being linked to.
Attach image
Add an image to the text area. The Insert Image page appears.
• Set Width and Height: leaving these fields blank renders the
image in its original size.
• Image Target URL: the URL entered here will make the
image a link. When the user clicks the image, they will go
to this URL.
• Alt text: Alternate text is important for visually impaired
users. Alternate text tells users what should appear if the
image does not display
Attach
MPEG/AVI
Add MPEG/AVI media content to the text area. The Insert MPEG file
page appears.
• Set Width and Height: the default width and height provided
are standard sizes for MPEG/AVI content, but may be
altered.
Add Quick Time
Add Apple QuickTime media to the text area. The Insert QuickTime
File page appears.
• Loop: QuickTime media allows the option to loop the movie.
If this is set to Yes, the media will replay as long as the
page is loaded.
Add audio
Add an audio file, such as .mp3, .midi or .wav to the text area. The
Insert Audio File page appears.
Add
Flash/Shockwave
Add Macromedia Flash or Shockwave media to the text area. The
Insert SWF File page appears.
• Set Quality: quality options are provided to allow the user to
choose between highest quality vs. highest performance.
The highest quality media will take the longest time to load
in a browser.
Differences between Text Box Editor and Visual Text Box Editor
The Text Box Editor and Visual Text Box Editor allow the entry of formatted text in the Blackboard
Academic Suite.
The Text Box Editor allows Plain Text, Smart Text and HTML formatting. The Visual Text Box
Editor allows users to modify content in an interface resembling a word processor, and perform
basic HTML functions without knowledge of any HTML. These features include creating tables,
bulleted lists, hyperlinks, horizontal lines, and more. Users may also format text and paragraphs,
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 29 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
and upload multimedia files in the Visual Text Box Editor. Both editors may include WebEQ,
MathML and SpellCheck features.
NOTE: The Visual Text Box editor is only available to Windows Operating
System users with Internet Explorer Version 5.x or a later.
System Administrators may turn off the Visual Text Box editor, Spell
Check, Web EQ and MathML for all users. Users may turn off the Visual
Text Box Editor in Personal Information settings.
If the Visual Text Box Editor is off, or if users are not using Windows
Internet Explorer, the Text Box Editor will be on.
Attaching files in the Visual Text Box Editor
Users have the option of attaching different types of files to the Visual Text Box Editor. Do not copy
and paste a file from one text box to another; this will cause errors.
The table below explains which button in the Third Row of the Visual Text Box Editor is used to add
different file types.
F ILE
ATTACHMENT TYPES
Attach file
.doc, .exe, .html, .htm, .pdf, .ppt, .pps, .txt, .wpd, .xls, .zip
Attach image
.gif, .jif, .jpg, .jpeg, .tiff, .wmf
Attach MPEG/AVI
.avi, .mpg, .mpeg
Add Quick Time
.qt
Add audio
.aiff, .asf, .moov, .mov, .mp, .wav, .wma, .wmv
Add Flash/Shockwave
.swa, .swf
Missing image detection in the Text Box Editors
Missing Image Detection functionality is available on the Add Item page under the following
scenarios when a user:
•
pastes HTML with a broken image into the HTML view of the Visual Text Box Editor
•
pastes HTML with a broken image into the Text Box Editor and selects the HTML option
•
pastes HTML with a broken image into the Text Box Editor selects the Smart Text option
Missing image detection functionality does not apply when a user:
•
pastes HTML with a broken image into the Text Box Editor and selects the Plain text
option
•
pastes HTML with a broken image into the Visual Text Box Editor
•
uploads an HTML file with a broken image from the third row of the Visual Text Box Editor
•
links to an HTML file in the Content Collection with a broken image (either via the third row
of the Visual Text Box Editor or as a URL in the Text Box Editor).
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 30 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
NOTE: Images are stored in HTML using the following syntax: <img
scr="http://image_path">. The source location should be inside double of
single quotations.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 31 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
Keyboard shortcuts for the Visual Text Box Editor
The Visual Text Box Editor supports the following keyboard shortcuts:
NOTE: If the shortcut keys that move selected items one character left,
right, up, or down are used, the object being moved will be absolutely
positioned. An absolutely positioned element is determined by pixels, so
moving it up once will move it up one pixel.
K EYBOARD S HORTCUTS
Movement
RIGHT ARROW
Move one character to the right.
LEFT ARROW
Move one character to the left.
DOWN ARROW
Move down one line.
UP ARROW
Move up one line.
CTRL+RIGHT ARROW
Move right one word.
CTRL+LEFT ARROW
Move left one word.
END
Move to the end of the line.
HOME
Move to the start of the line.
CTRL+DOWN ARROW
Move down one paragraph.
CTRL+UP ARROW
Move up one paragraph.
PAGE DOWN
Move down one page.
PAGE UP
Move up one page.
CTRL+HOME
Move to the beginning of the text.
CTRL+END
Move to the end of the text.
Selection
SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW
Extend the selection one character to the right.
SHIFT+LEFT ARROW
Extend the selection one character to the left.
CTRL+SHIFT+RIGHT
ARROW
Extend the selection right one word.
CTRL+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW
Extend the selection left one word.
SHIFT+UP ARROW
Extend the selection up one line.
SHIFT+DOWN ARROW
Extend the selection down one line.
SHIFT+END
Extend the selection to the end of the current line.
SHIFT+HOME
Extend the selection to the start of the current line.
SHIFT+PAGE DOWN
Extend the selection down one page.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 32 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
K EYBOARD S HORTCUTS
SHIFT+PAGE UP
Extend the selection up one page.
CTRL+SHIFT+END
Extend the selection to the end of the document.
CTRL+SHIFT+HOME
Extend the selection to the beginning of the document.
CTRL+A
Select all elements in the document.
Editing
BACKSPACE
Delete the selection. Or, if there is no selection, delete the
character to the left of the cursor.
CTRL+BACKSPACE
Delete all of a word to the left of the cursor.
CTRL+C
Copy the selection.
CTRL+V
Paste cut contents or copied contents.
CTRL+X
Cut the selection.
DELETE
Delete the selection.
INSERT
Toggle between inserting and overwriting text.
CTRL+Z
Undo the most recent formatting command.
CTRL+Y
Re-do the most recent undone command.
CTRL+F
Find text.
SHIFT+F10
Display the context menu. This is the same as a right-click.
Formatting
CTRL+B
Toggle bold formatting.
CTRL+I
Toggle italic formatting.
CTRL+U
Toggle underlining.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 33 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
SELECTING DATES
Overview
Availability of the course and individual content items, including Assessments and Learning Units,
can be controlled by date. Content may only be available within a certain range, available from a
certain date until the end of the course, or available from the date created until a specified end
date.
Setting availability by date
Dates are set using drop-down lists to select the day, month, year, and in some cases, time. There
is also a calendar interface that can be used to select the date.
•
To set availability to a set range, select both a start date and an end date.
•
To set availability from the current time until a certain date, only set an end date.
•
To set availability from a date until the end of the course, only set a start date.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 34 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
HTML TIPS
Overview
This section provides some basic HTML codes and tips for adding simple formatting to a Course.
Additional resources for learning more about HTML may be found at the end of this section.
What is HTML?
HTML is the set of codes used to format (or “mark up”) Web pages. A single piece of HTML code is
called a "tag." HTML tags are surrounded by pointed brackets ("<" and ">"). Tags usually come in
pairs.
For example the pair of HTML tags to create bold text looks like this:
<b>This text will be bold. </b>
The <b> tag means "start bold here." The end tag, </b>, means "end bold here." End tags always
include the forward slash ("/").
Paragraph formatting
In HTML, a paragraph break is used to put a single blank line between paragraphs. A hard return
inserts no blank line.
The tag can be used alone at the end of a paragraph, or as a pair. If used as a pair, the
"align=left|center|right" modifier may be included in the beginning tag to control placement.
For example, the following tag would create a right-aligned paragraph:
<P align=right>Fourscore and seven years ago, our founding father set
forth upon this continent a new nation.</P>
Text formatting
The following tags are used for basic text formatting:
Bold text tag: <B> text </B>
Italic text tag: <I> text </I>
Underlined text tag: <U> text </U>
Font format tags: <FONT> text </FONT>
(Font formats include FACE=fontstyle COLOR=fontcolor SIZE=fontsize)
The FONT tag requires at least one of the modifiers (FACE, COLOR, or SIZE).
The FACE modifier can be set to any font, but the person viewing the page must also have that font
installed on their computer. For that reason, it is best to stick to common fonts like Times New
Roman, Arial, or Courier New.
The COLOR modifier will recognize basic colors, including black, white, gray, red, blue, yellow,
green, purple, orange, cyan, magenta, and so forth.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 35 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
The SIZE modifier does not refer to typical font point sizes. In HTML fonts can be sizes 1 through 7.
The default font size is 3.
NOTE: Since each user may set the default font point at which their
browser will display text, these font sizes can be relative. For example, one
user might have their browser's default font set to 10-point Times while
another has their browser's default font set to 12-point Times. The HTML
tag would create 10-point Times text on the first computer, and 12-point on
the latter, since 3 is the default size.
Users may use plus or minus signs to indicate sizes relative to the default. For example, the
following HTML would create text that is two steps larger than the default font size:
<FONT size=+2>Bigger, Better, Faster!</FONT>
Creating Links with HTML
Links are created using the ‘anchor’ tag.
<A href="URL">Clickable text</A>
In the following example, the words ‘Blackboard Inc.’ will turn into a link that directs the user to the
Blackboard home page.
<A href="http://www.blackboard.com/">Blackboard Inc.</A>
Creating HTML with other tools
Course developers do not have to learn everything about HTML. They may also use Web authoring
tools to generate HTML. There are many applications that may be used for this. Some examples
are:
•
Word processors- Microsoft© Word™, Corel© WordPerfect™, Apple© AppleWorks™,
Sun© StarOffice™, and almost every other contemporary word processor contains the
ability to convert word processing documents to a Web page coded in HTML. However,
the conversion from a word processing document to an HTML Web page is often not
perfect, especially for documents with complex formatting.
•
WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) Web-authoring tools- These tools
provide an environment similar to a word processor for developing Web pages and entire
©
Web sites. There are many products to choose from, including, Macromedia
©
©
©
Dreamweaver™, Adobe GoLive™, NetObjects Fusion, and Microsoft FrontPage™.
•
HTML Editors- Applications like BareBones© Software's BBEdit™ and Macromedia©
Allaire HomeSite™ provide an editing environment for HTML documents. While they are
not WYSIWYG, HTML editors usually have a "preview" mode that allows users to switch
between viewing the raw HTML codes and previewing how those codes will look in the
browser. These products help write HTML faster and easier, but they presume the user is
already knowledgeable about HTML.
Incorporating HTML generated with other applications
Instructors may decide to incorporate HTML generated content with other applications into their
Course. There are two options for including this content:
Save the content as an HTML file and upload the HTML file itself into Blackboard Learning System.
In the Course area, next to the Special Action field, select Create a link to this file. The
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 36 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Learning System will automatically detect images in an HTML file and prompt the user
to upload the images as well.
Copy and paste the HTML code into a text box.
To copy and paste HTML code, follow the steps below:
1.
View the HTML code. Most of the tools discussed above will have a mechanism (usually
part of a View menu) to allow the user to see the ‘HTML source’.
2.
Copy all of the HTML tags between but not including the <BODY> and </BODY> tags.
The Blackboard Learning System dynamically generates the HTML above and below the
BODY tags, so this portion of the HTML source must not be copied.
3.
Paste the copied HTML into the text box.
4.
Choose the HTML text-formatting option.
5.
Submit the form.
6.
If there are <IMG> tags in the HTML, the Blackboard Learning System will automatically
detect them when the page is submitted. Users will receive a second page prompting
them to upload the appropriate images.
Troubleshooting
Blackboard recommends that users do not use the following in a Course:
•
Do not use multiple frames.
•
Do not add Web pages that contain additional navigational items, for example, buttons.
Only include links that directly point to a URL.
•
Do not add <body> tags, <html> tags, <head> tags, <form> tags, or <form element> tags.
Entering these tags will cause issues when the page is viewed.
•
Do not use inline style sheets. Inline style sheets are not supported by all browsers.
•
Do not use <applet> tags inside the text box. These tags may cause errors in the content.
Other HTML resources
There are many online resources for additional information about HTML. One that users may want
to visit is The World Wide Web Consortium located at www.w3.org.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 37 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
LINK TO FILE
Overview
Users may include a link to a file from the Text Box editor.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert Link to File page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Insert Link to File
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify URL
Enter a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system. For
example, from a central image repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
Link to File Options
Name of Link to File
Enter the name of the link that users click to access the attached
file.
Launch in new
window
Select Yes to have the file open in a new separate window. Select
No to have the file open in the content frame.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 38 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
INSERT MULTIMEDIA FILE
Overview
Users may add the following multimedia files when authoring content in the Text Box Editor.
•
Image.
•
MPEG or AVI. MPEG (Moving Picture Expert Groups) files are audio-visual files in a
digital compressed format. AVI (Audio Video Interleave) is Microsoft’s file format for
storing audio and video data.
•
Quicktime. QuickTime is a video and animation system that supports most formats,
including JPG and MPEG. Users with a PC will require a QuickTime driver to view
QuickTime files. Macintosh users do not require this driver.
•
Audio.
•
Flash or Shockwave. Macromedia Flash and Shockwave files support audio, animation
and video; they are also browser independent. Browsers require specific plug-ins to run
Flash and Shockwave files.
Image Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert Image page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Insert Image
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify URL
Enter a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system.
For example, from a central image repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
Image Options
Set the Width
Enter the width of the image in pixels.
Set the Height
Enter the height of the image in pixels.
Border
Choose a border for the image. If ‘0’ is chosen there will be no
border around the image.
Alt Text
Enter text that will be used display if the image fails to load.
Alternate text is important for visually impaired users who access
the Web.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 39 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MPEG or AVI Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert MPEG File page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Insert MPEG File
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify URL
Enter a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system.
For example, from a central image repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
MPEG File Options
Set the Width
Enter the width of the video in pixels.
Set the Height
Enter the height of the video in pixels.
AutoStart
Select Yes to start playing when the page is opened. Select No to
let users start playing manually after opening the page.
Controls
Select the size of controls to appear to users. Controls must be
available if users are to start the video manually.
Quicktime Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert QuickTime File page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Insert QuickTime File
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify URL
Enter a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system.
For example, from a central image repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
QuickTime File Options
Set the Width
Enter the width of the video.
Set the Height
Enter the height of the video.
AutoStart
Select Yes to start playing when the page is opened. Select No to
let users start playing manually after opening the page.
Loop
Choose whether the file should repeat continuously.
Controls
Select to display controls.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 40 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
Audio Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert Audio File page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Insert Audio File
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify URL
Enter a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system.
For example, from a central image repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
Audio File Options
AutoStart
Select Yes to start playing when the page is opened. Select No to
let users start playing manually after opening the page.
Loop
Choose whether the file should repeat continuously.
Controls
Select to display controls.
Flash or Shockwave Fields
The table below details the fields on the Insert SWF File page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Insert SWF File
Browse
Click Browse to locate a file.
OR Specify URL
Enter a URL to create a link to a file outside of the local system.
For example, from a central image repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
SWF File Options
Set the Width
Enter the width of the video.
Set the Height
Enter the height of the video.
AutoStart
Select Yes to start playing when the page is opened. Select No to
let users start playing manually after opening the page.
Loop
Choose whether the file should repeat continuously.
Set Quality
Select the quality of the images that will appear to users. Please
note that the better the quality of an image the larger the file.
Larger files take longer to open.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 41 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
ABOUT SPELL CHECK
Overview
The Spell Check feature supports a full English dictionary, a supplemental word list configured by
the System Administrator, and custom word lists that are stored as a cookie on a user’s local
machine. The spell check feature is available wherever users can enter blocks of text. It is also
available as a module with the Blackboard Portal System.
Word lists
Misspelled words are determined by the following three sources:
•
Spell Check Dictionary: A full English dictionary that includes words that will not be
flagged for correction. The dictionary is also the only source for suggestions. This
dictionary cannot be modified.
•
Supplemental Word List: A list of additional terms added by the System Administrator
that do not appear in the default dictionary.
•
Personal Word List: This word list is stored as a cookie on each user’s local machine.
Words are added to this list using the Learn function. The words in the personal word list
are not flagged for correction. These words are not included as suggestions for misspelled
words.
Extensive personal word lists may slow performance of the Spell Check tool.
Personal word list and cookies
The personal word list is stored as a cookie on the user’s local machine. The cookie is not user or
installation specific. Therefore, a user’s word list will be available to them whenever they are using
Spell Check as long as they are on the same local machine. Also, if another user logs onto the
same machine, that user will have the personal word list stored on that machine applied to Spell
Check. For example, if a user creates a personal word list on a computer in the computer lab, this
word list will be available to all users who use this computer in the lab. The user may not take this
word list with them to a different computer.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 42 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
USING SPELL CHECK
Overview
When Spell Check is launched it will review the text block and sequentially bring up any words it
does not recognize for review.
Functions
The table below details the functions available with Spell Check.
TO . . .
THEN
...
replace
the
occurrence of a
word
with
a
correction
or
suggestion
enter a correction in the Replace With field or select a suggestion
from the list. Click Replace to change the word in the text to the
word in the Replace With field. If the misspelled word appears
later in the text block it will be flagged again for correction.
replace
every
occurrence of a
word in the text with
a
correction
or
suggestion
enter a correction in the Replace With field or select a suggestion
from the list. Click Replace All to change every occurrence of the
word in the text with the word in the Replace With field.
ignore the word and
not
make
a
correction
click Ignore. The word will not be changed. If the word appears
again in the text block it will be flagged for correction.
ignore
every
occurrence of the
word in the text
block
click Ignore All. The word will not be changed and Spell Check will
not flag it for correction again in the text.
teach Spell Check
to recognize the
word as correct
click Learn. The word will be added to the personal word list.
Whenever Spell Check is run on the local machine the word will be
recognized and not flagged.
close
the
spell
check
without
finishing
click Finish.
Recognized errors
Note how Spell Check handles the following circumstances:
•
Double words are recognized as errors.
•
Irregular capitalization is not recognized as an error.
•
Initial capitalization at the beginning of sentences is not checked.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 43 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
•
Words in ALL CAPS are checked for spelling errors.
•
Words that contain numbers are recognized as errors.
•
A word that appears in the supplemental or personal word list must be entered as a
correction during a spell check (these words do not appear as suggestions). The Spell
Check tool must be run again to verify that the word is spelled correctly.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 44 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MATH AND SCIENCE NOTATION TOOL – WEBEQ EQUATION EDITOR
Overview
The Math and Science Notation Tool (WebEQ Equation Editor) is a general purpose equation
editor. The Math and Science Notation Tool enables users to use mathematical and scientific
notation. Users can add equations, edit existing equations, and move equations within the Equation
Editor. All of the Equation Editor symbols are based on MathML, a markup language for math on
the Web. MathML is a subset of XML.
For best performance on a Windows® operating system use Internet Explorer 6.0.
For best performance on a Macintosh®:
Mac OS X v10.2
Netscape® 6.2.3 (or a later version)
Install the MRJPlug-in. http://homepage.mac.com/pcbeard/MRJPlugin/
MathML Equation Editor
The MathML Equation Editor functions in the same way at the Math and Science Notation Tool.
Instead of opening with the symbol buttons, a blank text box will appear where users can enter
XML.
Functions
The table below details how to access the Equation Editors.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
access the WebEQ
Equation Editor
the Math and Science Notation Tool icon.
insert XML
the MathML Equation Editor icon.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 45 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADDING AND EDITING EQUATIONS
Overview
Once an equation has been created it can be copied and used again or copied and modified using
the Notation Tool features.
Functions
The table below describes the functions available in the Math and Science Notation Tool.
TO . . .
THEN
...
create a name for
the equation
enter a name in the Equation Name: field. To accept the default
name do not make any changes.
create an equation
use the equation symbols available on the keyboard or in the
toolbar to create equations.
modify an existing
equation
select the equation from the Edit Equation: drop-down list. The
equation will appear in the Editor. Click Modify to save the
changes.
submit the equation
and its name
click Add.
Tip
If an equation is more then one line or uses a large font size, the equation may be cut off when it
appears in a course. Add an empty line after the final line in the equation to prevent this error.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 46 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 3 - COURSE CREATION WIZARD
Overview
The Course Creation Wizard enables users to create courses through an easy workflow. The
Wizard consists of a series of pages that breaks up the numerous aspects of course creation into a
sequence of manageable pieces. Instructors can use the wizard to complete the initial setup of a
course in one easy-to–follow process.
NOTE: Only courses may be created through the Course Creation Wizard.
Organizations may not be created through this method.
Find this page
To open the Course Creation Wizard, select the link in the Course Creation Wizard Module on the
My Institution tab. The wizard will appear in a pop-up window.
Wizard navigation
Users may use the links at the bottom of each Wizard page to navigate within the Wizard. These
links include options for Cancel, Back, Next, and Finish. All links may not be available on all pages
within the Wizard.
Wizard Progress Tracker
The Wizard Progress Tracker appears on the left side of each page in the Wizard and represents
the entire workflow of the Course Creation Wizard. Users can view where they are in the workflow
as they build a course. There are no navigation options in the Wizard Progress Tracker.
Wizard steps
The Welcome page gives an overview of the different steps for creating a course through the
Course Creation Wizard. Users may choose to skip some of these steps.
NOTE: If the user skips steps in the Wizard, these options will automatically
be set to the system defaults. These settings may be modified through the
Control Panel once the course is created.
The following list includes all of the steps for creating a course:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Course Information
Enter course information, such as Course Name, Course ID, and a
description of the course.
Course Materials
Select a template, course cartridge, or an existing course to use as
the basis of the course, or create a new course.
Course Design
Design the buttons and text for the course
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 47 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Course Menu
Add or remove options that appear on the Course Menu.
Availability
Duration
and
Enrollment Options
Select which users this course will be available to.
Select how users will be enrolled the course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 48 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE CREATION WIZARD - COURSE INFORMATION
Overview
The Course Creation Wizard consists of a series of pages that breaks up the numerous aspects of
course creation into a sequence of manageable pieces. The user enters course details, such as the
Title and Course ID on the Course Information page.
Fields
The table below details the entry fields on the Course Information page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Course Information
Course Name
Enter a name for the course.
Course ID
Enter a unique Course ID. The Course ID should not have any
spaces or characters other than numbers and letters, dash (-),
underscore (_), and period (.). Do not use special characters.
Special characters include: %&#<>=+ as well as spaces. When
creating attributes a good rule to follow is only use alphanumeric
characters, underscores, dots, and dashes.
Description
Enter a description of the course. The description will appear in
the listing with the course name and ID. A summary and
enrollment instructions should be included in the description.
NOTE: If the user returns to this page after the course has been created, he
or she will see a read-only view of this page. The data in these fields may
not be changed after the wizard is complete.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 49 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE CREATION WIZARD - COURSE MATERIALS
Overview
The Course Creation Wizard consists of a series of pages that breaks up the numerous aspects of
course creation into a sequence of manageable pieces. The Course Content page allows the user
to choose a template, an existing course, or a Course Cartridge as the basis for the new course.
Users may also choose to create an entirely new course.
Fields
The table below details options on the Course Content page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Create an entirely
new course.
Select this option to create a course that is not based on an
existing course, template or Course Cartridge.
Create a course
using a Template
Select this option to create a course using a course Template in the
system.
Template
down list
drop-
A list of course templates available in the system. Select a template
to use for this course. When a template is used, all of the course
content in the template course is copied to the new course. The
Instructor may change course settings and course content in the
destination course once they have completed the Wizard.
Create a course
from an existing
course
Select this option to create the course by copying an existing
course.
Course
down list
A list of courses in which the user is an Instructor, TA or Course
Builder. Select the course to copy to create this new course. Only
the course content (not user data) will be copied from the existing
course into the new course. The Instructor may modify the course
content in the destination course.
drop-
Create the course
using a Course
Cartridge
Select this option to create a course using a Course Cartridge.
Course Cartridge
Instructor
Download key
Enter the download key for the Course Cartridge.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 50 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE CREATION WIZARD - COURSE DESIGN
Overview
The Course Creation Wizard consists of a series of pages that breaks up the numerous aspects of
course creation into a sequence of manageable pieces. Instructors select the appearance of a
Course on the Course Design page.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Course Design page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select a Navigation Style
Navigation Style
Select Buttons to make the areas of the Course Menu appear in a
button format.
Select Text Navigation to make areas of the Course Menu appear
in a text format.
Select a Button Style
When the Button Navigation Style is chosen an additional set of functions must be defined. The
table below details the fields on the Select Style Properties section for buttons.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Style Properties
Button Type
Choose the Button Type from the drop-down list.
Button Shape
Click an option to choose the Button Shape.
Button Style
Use the drop-down list to select the color of the buttons.
Click Gallery of Buttons to view all of the button options.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 51 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
Select Text Navigation Colors
When the Text Navigation Style is chosen an additional set of functions must be defined. The table
below details the fields on the Select Style Properties section for text.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Style Properties
Select
background color
for navigation
Click Pick and select a background color for the Course Menu.
Select a highlight
color
for
the
navigation
Click Pick and select a color for the text in the Course Menu.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 52 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
COURSE CREATION WIZARD - COURSE MENU
Overview
The Course Creation Wizard consists of a series of pages that breaks up the numerous aspects of
course creation into a sequence of manageable pieces. The Course Menu page allows the user to
choose which options will appear in the Course Menu.
Functions
If the user selected to create a new course they may add and remove items on the Course Menu. If
the user selected an option to use a template, an existing course or a Course Cartridge on the
Course Content page, he or she will be unable to modify the Course Menu. The Course Menu is
automatically copied from the existing course, template or cartridge. Users can modify the Course
Menu after the course is created from the Control Panel.
Adding a menu item creates a Course area with a name specified by the user. New Course areas
are automatically available to Students, and unavailable to Guests and Observers.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 53 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE CREATION WIZARD – AVAILABILITY AND DURATION
Overview
The Course Creation Wizard consists of a series of pages that breaks up the numerous aspects of
course creation into a sequence of manageable pieces. The Availability and Duration page is used
to control access to the course and the course duration.
Fields
The table below details options on the Availability and Duration page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Guest Access
Guest Access
Select either Yes or No to make the course available to Guests.
Course Availability
Availability
Select either Yes or No to make the course available to users. If
the course is set to available, all users participating in the course
will have access. If the course is set to unavailable, access is
determined by course role. Courses that are unavailable will not
appear in the Course Catalog.
Course Duration
Continuous
Select this option to make the course continuously available. If this
option is selected the course will always be available.
Select Dates
Select this option to set the course availability for a specific number
of days. Use the drop down list to select the starting and ending
dates of the course or click the calendar icon to select dates from
the calendar interface. The course may also begin on a specific
date and not have a specific end date.
After the end date, the course is no longer available for Students
but is otherwise unchanged. Students who attempt to login to the
Course are told that the course has ended.
Days (from the
date of
enrollment)
Select this option to place a time limit on a self-paced course. The
course will be available for that number of days from the time a
Student enrolls. For example, if the number of days is set to 10, the
course will be available for 10 days to each Student who enrolls.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 54 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
Course role availability
The following table describes what type of access different user roles have to a course that is
unavailable:
C OURSE R OLE
A CCESS
Students
Courses set to Unavailable will not appear at all in the Student’s
My Courses module on the My Institution tab, or in the Student’s
Course List on the Courses tab. Students may not access a Course
that is set to Unavailable.
Instructors
Courses set to Unavailable will appear in the Courses you are
teaching: section of the My Courses module and in the Course List
on the Courses tab. The course will be indicated as Unavailable,
but will still be accessible by the Instructor.
Course
Builders
and
Teaching
Assistants
Courses set to Unavailable will appear in the Courses in which
you are participating: section of the My Courses module and in
the Course List on the Courses tab. The course will be indicated as
Unavailable. The course is still accessible by Course Builders and
Teaching Assistants.
Graders
Courses set to Unavailable will appear in the Courses in which
you are participating: section of the My Courses module and in
the Course List on the Courses tab. The course will be indicated as
Unavailable to others but is accessible by Graders.
WHEN COURSE IS UNAV AILABLE
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 55 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE CREATION WIZARD - COURSE ENROLLMENT
Overview
The Course Creation Wizard consists of a series of pages that breaks up the numerous aspects of
course creation into a sequence of manageable pieces. Instructors set the enrollment process for a
course from the Course Enrollment page. Enrollment can also be limited to a set time and to those
Students that receive approval and are granted an access code.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Course Enrollment page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Enrollment Options
Instructor/Admin
Select this option to make course enrollment Instructor and
Administrator led. Select the check box to create a link for
Students to email an enrollment request to the Instructor. The
link appears in the course catalog.
Self Enrollment
Select this option to allow Students to enroll in a course as
determined by the limits defined in the starting date, ending
date, and access code.
Select Enrollment Options
Start Date
Select this option to set an enrollment start date. Choose an
enrollment start date by clicking the drop-down arrow and
selecting date values or click the calendar icon to select a
date from the calendar interface. If Self Enrollment is
selected this date is required.
End Date
Select this option to set an enrollment end date. Choose an
enrollment end date by clicking the drop-down arrows and
selecting date values or click the icon to select a date from
the calendar interface. If Self Enrollment is selected this date
is required.
Require Access Code
to Enroll
Select this option to require an access code to enroll. Enter
an access code that will be distributed to approved Students.
If selected, this access code will be required for Students to
enroll in the course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 56 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 4 - CONTENT
Introduction
Instructors use the tools available through the Course areas section of the Control Panel to
manage information, materials, Assignments, and Assessments used in the course.
NOTE: Instructors can set the name of Course areas and add additional
Course areas from Manage Course Menu.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following functions:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Content Areas
Reviews Content Areas. Content Areas are the top-level containers
that organize and store content.
Course Content
Describes how content is used in courses.
Items
Introduces individual content Items.
File Attachments
Describes how to upload files.
Add SCORM, IMS
and NLN Content
Explains how to add SCORM, NLN, and IMS content to a Content
Area.
Folders
Reviews the organization of Content Areas into folders.
Content Metadata
Presents the attributes that can be used to describe content.
External Links
Describes how to link to an outside Web site.
Course Link
Describes how to link to content in another course.
Learning Units
Presents information on Learning Units. Learning Units organize
content sequentially.
Tests
Describes how to deploy a test in a Content Area.
Test Options
Reviews the options available when deploying a test.
Assignments
Describes Assignments.
Tool Linking
Describes how to create a link to a tool within a Content Area.
Copy and Move
Content
Reviews how to copy and move Items.
The Open
Standards Content
Player
Provides detailed information on using the Open Standards
Content Player to present SCORM, NLN, and IMS content.
Syllabus
Describes how to build a syllabus for the course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 57 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Adaptive Release
Introduces the concept of adaptive release of content.
Adaptive Release
Functions
Describes the functions used to manage adaptive release.
Adaptive Release
Criteria
Explains the rules that govern adaptive release.
Review Status
Describes how Instructors can check that Students have viewed
content.
User Progress
Explains how adaptive release can be used to track Student
progress through the content a Student views.
Performance
Dashboard
Describes the Performance Dashboard view into Student progress.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 58 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
CONTENT AREAS
About Content Areas
Course Content Areas are used to organize all course content materials. A link to each Content
Area creates the first level of the Course Menu tree directory. Course developers organize and
manage Content Areas from the Control Panel.
While the Instructor has almost complete control over the Content Areas through the Control Panel,
the Administrator is able to set defaults and overrides that define the names and default availability
of course areas in each course.
Adding a Content Area
By default, a specific number of Content Areas appear in a course. Instructors may decide to add
additional Content Areas or modify existing Content Areas. For example, a Content Area for
Assessments may be added and the name of the Assignments area may be changed to
Homework.
Follow the steps below to add a Content Area:
1.
Select Manage Course Menu under Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Content Area.
3.
Complete the Add New Area page. The availability of this area is also set on this page.
The new Content Area may be made available to Guests, Observers, and/ or Students in
the course.
4.
Existing Content Areas may be changed by selecting Modify next to a Content Area on
the Manage Course Menu page and updating the information.
Manage Content Areas
Once Content Areas for the course have been created, content creation may begin. All content is
added and modified within the Content Areas. Select a Content Area on the Control Panel to open
the main Content Area page. All actions related to managing content are available from this page.
This includes:
•
Add, remove and edit items
•
Organize the order of items
•
Add and manage Adaptive Release rules
•
Create and modify content metadata
•
Manage Statistics Tracking
•
Enable / Disable Review Status
•
View User progress
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 59 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE CONTENT
About Content Types
Instructors may add a number of different kinds of content to course Content Areas; these are
referred to as Content Types. Content Types generally fall into two different categories:
•
Content – Content that adds information to a course, for example, a file or a Learning Unit.
•
Reference – Content that references something that lies outside the Content Area, such
as an External Link or a Course Link.
All content shares a few similarities; each piece of content includes a name and description. Many
Content Types also allow the Instructor to set options such as availability and date restrictions.
Content Type descriptions
Content Types may be selected from the Action Bar and drop-down list of a Content Area page.
C ONTENT T YPE
D ESCRIPTION
Item
A general piece of content to which items
may be attached.
Test
On-line evaluations of Student knowledge
and skills. Test properties, such as
availability and presentation options, are
managed through the course area where
the Test appears. For information on
building Tests and other Assessments see
the section on How to Create an
Assessment.
Assignment
Content that Instructors may mark based
on a given number of points possible, such
as class work.
Learning Unit
A set of content that includes a structured
path for progressing through the items.
Folder
A folder within a Content Area to which
other content types may be added. Folders
allow Instructors to organize a Content
Area into a structured area with a hierarchy
or categories.
External Link
Link to an outside Web site.
Course Link
Link to another item in a course.
Survey
Similar to Tests, Surveys are useful to
polling
purposes
and
evaluations.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 60 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
C ONTENT T YPE
D ESCRIPTION
Questions in Surveys cannot be assigned
points and Surveys may not be graded.
Tool
Link to a tool in the course, such as a
Discussion Board or Virtual Classroom
session.
Offline Content
A direct path to a specified file on a drive,
usually a CD-ROM. To access this file,
users must have the correct CD-ROM in
their computer.
Syllabus Builder
Content item that enables an Instructor to
build a course syllabus by walking through
a series of steps.
SCORM Content
Content that adheres to Sharable Content
Object Reference Model (SCORM)
standards.
IMS Content
Content that matches IMS specifications.
Additional information may be found at
http://www.imsproject.org.
NLN Content
A package of content developed by the
National Learning Network. (NLN) Additional
information
may
be
found
at
http://www.nln.ac.uk.
Content Availability
When a content item is added to a course it is not automatically available. An availability option on
the Add and Modify pages allows the user to set the content to available or unavailable. This allows
the Instructor to create content and save it in a draft format before it is made available within a
course. This availability setting is separate from Adaptive Release. If an item is not available users
may not access it regardless of the Adaptive Release rules.
Content Options
When an item is added to a Content Area a number of options are available on the Add page. The
options available depend on the Content Type; not all options are always available. These options
are used to set availability, date restrictions, and tracking. The following is a description of all of the
options that may be available:
C ONTENT T YPE
D ESCRIPTION
Make the content available
Select Yes to make the content available
to users. If No is selected this content is
unavailable, regardless of Adaptive
Release rules.
Open in new window
Select Yes to open the item in a separate
browser window. This is helpful as users
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 61 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
C ONTENT T YPE
D ESCRIPTION
may continue viewing the Content Area
along with the item.
Choose date restrictions
Select the range of dates that this item will
appear. Select the Display After checkbox
for the item to appear after a specific date.
If this option is checked, select the
corresponding date and time below. Select
the Display Until checkbox for the item to
appear until a specific date. If this option is
checked, select the corresponding date
and time below.
Track number of views
Select Yes to track the Course Statistics and
generate reports on usage and activity for
the item.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 62 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ITEMS
About Items
Items are general pieces of content added to a course to which items may be attached.
Add an Item
Follow the steps below to add an item to a Content Area:
1.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents, from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Item from the Action Bar.
3.
Complete the Add Item page and click Submit.
Attach a file to an item
Files from a local system may be attached to an item in a Content Area. See File Attachments for
additional information about file types and file names. Follow the steps below to attach a file to an
item:
1.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents, from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Item from the Action Bar.
3.
Complete Section 1 – Content Information of the Add Item page.
4.
Select Browse next to Attach Local file. Select the file on the local system and add it to
the field.
5.
Complete the Name of Link to File field. This name appears to users; they will select this
link to open the attached file.
6.
Select an option in the drop-down list in the Special Action field. See Special Actions for
more information about these options.
7.
Complete Section 3 – Options and click Submit.
Files may also be attached to an item from the Content Collection. In Step 4, select
Browse next to Link to Content Collection. Select the file on the Content Collection
window that appears.
NOTE: The Blackboard Learning System can recognize additional file
types and associated applications if a MIME extension is added. Contact
your System Administrator for more information about adding MIME
extensions.
NOTE: Users who have the third row of the Visual Text Box Editor
available may use the options in the third row to add items.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 63 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
Special Actions
Section two of the Add Item page contains a Special Action field which allows users to select the
behavior of files attached to an item. The following Special Actions are available:
•
Create a link to this file: Attach the file to the item. A link is automatically inserted below
the document title to access the file.
•
Display media file within the page: Display media file within the page: Embed certain
kinds of media within the page itself instead of creating a link. When this option is
selected, the file will not appear in the Currently Attached Files field after the page is
submitted. The image or image tag for the file will appear in the Text Box Editor. (The
image may appear in a black or transparent box.) Embed certain kinds of media within the
page itself instead of creating a link. When this option is selected, the file will not appear in
the Currently Attached Files field after the page is submitted. The image or image tag for
the file will appear in the Text Box Editor. (The image may appear in a black or
transparent box.) If this option is selected, the attached file must be a format recognizable
by the Blackboard Learning System. If it is not, a link to the file is automatically created.
•
Unpackage this file: Indicates to the system that the file must be unpackaged before
displaying.
NOTE: If the file format is not one of the supported digital media formats,
the Display media file within the page feature will default to the Create a
link to this file feature.
Embed image files
Image files may be embedded in Items. The following steps explain how to embed an image file
(for example, a .jpg file) in a Content Area.
1.
In the Control Panel, open a Content Area such as Course Documents.
2.
Select Add Item on the Content Area page. The Add Item page appears.
3.
Enter a title for the content item and add a description or introduction to the image in the
text box.
4.
Click Browse next to Attach local file and locate the image to add.
5.
The Name of Link to File field may be left blank. The image is being displayed on the
page.
6.
Select Display media file within the page in the Special Action drop-down list.
7.
Select the appropriate options for the item.
8.
Click Submit and then OK. The Content Actions page appears.
9.
Select the position of the image in the Alignment and Placement fields.
10. In the Set Width and Set Height field enter the width and height of the image in pixels.
11. To create a link to a file outside of the local system, enter the URL in Image Target URL.
For example, if the image exists in a central repository, the URL may be
http://blackboard/images/picture1.jpeg.
12. Use the drop-down list in Border to choose a border for the image. This option determines
the thickness of the border around the image. If ‘0’ is chosen there will be no border
around the image.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 64 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
13. Enter a description for the image in Alt Text. Alternate text is important for visually
impaired users. Alternate text tells users what should appear if the image does not
display.
14. Select Yes in Launch in New Window so the image will appear in a separate browser
window. This is especially important if a URL has been entered in Image Target URL.
15. Click Submit.
NOTE: The file will not appear in the Currently Attached Files field after the
page is submitted. An image tag for the file will appear in the Text box.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 65 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
FILE ATTACHMENTS
About file attachments
File attachments may be added to different places in a course, for example, to an Item, an
Assignment, or a File in a Learning Unit. There are two options for adding file attachments:
•
Files on local network: Select Browse next to Browse Local Files to navigate to a file
on the network.
•
Files in the Blackboard Content System: Select Browse next to Link to Content
Collection item to navigate to a file in the Blackboard Content System.
Users will open the file by clicking a link to the file that appears in the course. After selecting a file
to attach, users may enter a name for the link to the file. This name will appear to users, instead of
the name of the document. For example, users would see “Biology Syllabus” instead of
syllabus_bio_101.doc.
Accepted characters in file names
The characters a-z, 0-9, period ‘.’ and underscore ‘_’ are acceptable in file names. Any ISO-8859-1
character (also referred to as Latin 1) may be used in a file name. Characters that are not ISO8859-1are not supported.
Recognized content attachments
The following file types are recognized by the Blackboard Learning System. These files can be
displayed within a content item.
NOTE: The Blackboard Learning System can recognize additional file types
and associated applications if a MIME extension is added. Contact your
System Administrator for more information about adding MIME extensions.
E XTENSION
.aam
F ILE T YPE
Multimedia
P ROGRAMS
T YPE
ASSOCIATED WITH THE
F ILE
Macromedia® Authorware® plug-in
Note that the .aam file is the starting
point for a series of files that must be
enclosed in a .ZIP file.
.aiff
Audio
Audio program
.asf
Multimedia
Microsoft® .NET™ Show
.au
Audio
Real Audio Player™
.avi
Video
Video player (not Macintosh®
compatible)
.doc
Text
Microsoft® Word® or other word
processor
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 66 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
E XTENSION
F ILE T YPE
P ROGRAMS
T YPE
ASSOCIATED WITH THE
F ILE
.exe
Executable
Executable file
.gif
Image
Graphics program or Web browser
.html, .htm
Web page
HTML editor or Web browser
.jpg, .jpeg
Image
Graphics program or Web browser
.jif
Image
Graphics program or Web browser
.mp3
Audio
Audio program
.mpe
Audio/Video
Audio program
.mpg, .mpeg
Image
Graphics program or Web browser
.moov,movie
Movie
QuickTime® movie
.mov
Video
Movie or media player
.pdf
Text
Adobe® Acrobat® Reader®
.png
Image
Portable Network Graphics
.ppt, .pps
Slide show
Microsoft®
PowerPoint®
PowerPoint Player®
.qt
Movie
QuickTime®
.ra
Audio
Real Audio Player™
.ram
Video
Real Audio Movie™
.rm
Audio
Audio program
.rtf
Text
Rich Text Format
.swf
Multimedia
Macromedia® Shockwave® plug-in
.tiff, .tif
Image
Graphics program or Web browser
.txt
Text
Text or HTML editor, word processor
.wav
Audio
Audio program
.wma
Audio
Audio program
.wmf
Graphic
Microsoft® Windows®
.wmv
Media/Audio
Microsoft® Windows®
.wpd
Text
WordPerfect® or other word processor
.xls
Spreadsheet
Microsoft® Excel®
.zip
Text
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
and
WinZip®
Page 67 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD SCORM, IMS, AND NLN CONTENT
Overview
The processes for adding SCORM, IMS or NLN are generally the same. Interaction options for
navigation, Gradebook options, and content options are set at this time.
Add SCORM Content
The table below details the fields on the Add and Modify SCORM Content pages.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Required Information
Title
Select a name that best describes the content.
Add Content Package
Browse to select a SCORM package to add. This option only
appears on the Add SCORM Content page.
Name of Link
The default link name is Click to Launch. Rename this on the
Modify SCORM Content page.
Text
Add instructions or other text on the Modify SCORM Content
page.
Interactions Options
Navigation
Type
Control
If Choice is selected, the viewer can use a left navigation menu to
select which content to view. If Flow is selected, the left
navigation menu does not appear and the viewer must use the
Next and Previous buttons to view content sequentially.
Gradebook Options
Add Gradebook Item
Select Yes to add a Gradebook Item to the Gradebook for the
content item. The name will be the name of the package and may
be modified and managed from the Gradebook once added.
Points Possible
Enter the points possible for this item. If nothing is entered, the
item will be given 0 points possible. This and other Gradebook
item properties can be modified and managed from the
Gradebook.
Track Attempt Details
Select Yes to be able to view user interaction with the content,
such as total viewing time and question responses. From the
Modify Grade page, click the View button to see the Attempt
Details.
First Attempt Only
If Yes is selected for First Attempt Only, attempt details will only
display for the first time the user accesses the content. If the user
does not go through the whole package, subsequent attempts will
not be tracked. Leaving this value as No will always show the last
attempt data. This setting is for tracking data only; it does not
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 68 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
restrict how often the content can be viewed by the user.
Content Options
Do you want to make
the assignment visible?
Select Yes to make the SCORM content available.
Do you want to track
number of views?
Select Yes to track the number of times users access this item.
Use the Course Statistics page to view a comprehensive report.
Availability Dates
Select the range of dates that the content will appear.
Add IMS Content
The table below details the fields on the Add IMS Content and Modify IMS Content pages.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Required Information
Title
Select a name that best describes the content.
Add Content Package
Browse to select an IMS package to add. This option shows on
the Add IMS Content page only.
Name of Link
The default link name is Click to Launch. You can rename this on
the Modify IMS Content page.
Text
To add instructions or other text, add it on the Modify IMS
Content page.
Interactions Options
Navigation
Type
Control
If Choice is selected, the viewer can use a left navigation menu to
select which content to view. If Flow is selected, the left
navigation menu does not appear and the viewer must use the
Next and Previous buttons to view content sequentially.
Gradebook Options
Add Gradebook Item
Selecting Yes will add a Gradebook Item to the Gradebook for the
content item. The name will be the name of the package, and can
be modified and managed from the Gradebook once added.
Points Possible
Enter the points possible for this item. If nothing is entered, the
item will be given 0 points possible. This and other Gradebook
item properties can be modified and managed from the
Gradebook.
Track Attempt Details
Select Yes to be able to view user interaction with the content,
such as total viewing time and question responses. From the
Modify Grade page, click the View button to see the Attempt
Details.
First Attempt Only
If Yes is selected for First Attempt Only, attempt details will only
display for the first time the user accesses the content. If the user
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 69 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
does not go through the whole package, subsequent attempts will
not be tracked. Leaving this value as No will always show the last
Attempt data. This setting is for tracking data only; it does not
restrict how often the content can be viewed by the user.
Content Options
Do you want to make
the assignment visible?
Select Yes to make the IMS content available.
Do you want to track
number of views?
Select Yes to track the number of times users access this item.
Use the Course Statistics page to view a comprehensive report.
Availability Dates
Select the range of dates that the content will appear.
Add NLN Content
The table below details the fields on the Add NLN Content and Modify NLN Content pages.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Required Information
Title
Select a name that best describes the content.
Add Content Package
Browse to select a NLN package to add. This option shows on
the Add NLN Content page only.
Name of Link
The default link name is Click to Launch. You can rename this on
the Modify NLN Content page.
Text
To add instructions or other text, add it on the Modify NLN
Content page.
Interactions Options
Navigation
Type
Control
If Choice is selected, the viewer can use a left navigation menu to
select which content to view. If Flow is selected, the left
navigation menu does not appear and the viewer must use the
Next and Previous buttons to view content sequentially.
Gradebook Options
Add Gradebook Item
Selecting Yes will add a Gradebook Item to the Gradebook for the
content item. The name will be the name of the package, and can
be modified and managed from the Gradebook once added.
Points Possible
Enter the points possible for this item. If nothing is entered, the
item will be given 0 points possible. This and other Gradebook
item properties can be modified and managed from the
Gradebook.
Track Attempt Details
Select Yes to be able to view user interaction with the content,
such as total viewing time and question responses. From the
Modify Grade page, click the View button to see the Attempt
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 70 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Details.
First Attempt Only
If Yes is selected for First Attempt Only, attempt details will only
display for the first time the user accesses the content. If the user
does not go through the whole package, subsequent attempts will
not be tracked. Leaving this value as No will always show the last
Attempt data. This setting is for tracking data only; it does not
restrict how often the content can be viewed by the user.
Content Options
Do you want to make
the assignment visible?
Select Yes to make the NLN content available.
Do you want to track
number of views?
Select Yes to track the number of times users access this item.
Use the Course Statistics page to view a comprehensive report.
Availability Dates
Select the range of dates that the content will appear.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 71 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
FOLDERS
About Folders
Folders are useful for organizing and structuring content in a Content Area. For example,
Instructors may add folders for each week of the course to a Content Area, or organize the Content
Area by topic, such as separate folder for Assignments, Assessments, and Group Projects.
Once a folder is created, content and additional subfolders may be added to it. All of the Content
Types available in Content Areas may be added to a folder.
Add a Folder
Follow the steps below to add a folder to a Content Area:
1.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents, from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Folder from the Action Bar.
3.
Complete the Add Folder page and click Submit.
Folder content availability
Availability of items in a Content Area can be established on an item-by-item basis, but the actual
display of items to users is contingent upon the availability of any parent folder on up to the root of
the content area. If any parent folder is unavailable, the items within it are unavailable. For
example, if a folder is set to Unavailable, but items within the folder are set to Available, users
would be unable to view the items within the folder.
This is also true for items with Adaptive Release rules. If a folder has a rule that makes it
unavailable to a Student, all content wihin that folder is also unavailable to the user.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 72 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CONTENT METADATA
About Content Metadata
Content Metadata stores information about a piece of content. Metadata allows for IMS
compatibility when content is imported and exported. Click Manage next to the item in the Content
Area to open the Manage item page which includes a link to Metadata.
NOTE: The information entered in Content Metadata cannot be tracked or
reported on. It can only be viewed on the Content Metadata page as
reference information for the Content Item.
Metadata options
The table below describes the fields on the Content Metadata page. Select Edit to display the fields
in each section.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Item Information
Title
Displays the title of the content item.
Catalog Entry
The catalog and version information in the Source and Entry
Fields. Once a Catalog Entry is made a check box appears
next to the item. Select the check box and click Submit to
remove an entry.
Source
The name of the catalog or source of the content.
Entry
The number or version of the catalog.
Language
The language of the content item.
Description
A description of the content item.
Life Cycle Information
Creation Date
Displays the date and time the content item was created.
Contributors
The names of others who contributed to this content item.
Once a Contributor is entered a check box appears next to the
item. Select the check box and click Submit to remove a
Contributor.
Person
The name of the author or editor.
Role
The role of the person, such as author, contributor, or editor.
Organization
The name of the organization associated with the person.
Date
The date the person made these changes or updates.
Technical Information
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 73 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Resource Format
The type of application this content item uses.
Resource Location
The location of the item displays in this field.
Rights Management Information
Free Resource:
Establish if the Content was free or if it was purchased.
Copyright/Restriction
Establish if this Content is copyrighted or if it has any
restrictions.
Description
Comment on any conditions of use for this item.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 74 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
EXTERNAL LINKS
About External Links
Links to outside Web sites may be added to Content Areas as External Links. When entering a
URL, always enter the full Web address to the link. For example, enter http://www.blackboard.com,
not www.blackboard.com or blackboard.com.
Add an External Link
Follow the steps below to add an External Link to a Content Area:
1.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents, from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add External Link from the Action Bar.
3.
Complete the Add External Link page with a Name, Description, and URL for the link.
Note that the URL is required.
4.
Click Submit.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 75 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE LINK
About Course Links
Course Links are used to link to other items within a course. All items that appear in the Course
Map may be linked to using a Course Link. For example, an Instructor may create a Discussion
Board where users discuss the class readings. A link to this Discussion Board may be placed in the
Content Area where the articles are posted, such as Course Documents.
NOTE: A Course Link may be viewed as long as it is available to users in the
course. The Course link may be opened if the user has access to the item
based on the item’s availability and adaptive release rules. For example, if a
user does not have access to the item, a message appears when the link is
selected.
Add a Course Link
Follow the steps below to add a Course Link to a Content Area:
1.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents, from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Course Link from the Action Bar. The Add Course Link page appears.
3.
In Section 1 of the page enter a name and description. In Section 2, click Browse to open
the Course Map. Click the link for an item in the Course Map to select it as the Course
Link. In Section 3, set the options for the Course Link. Click Submit.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 76 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
LEARNING UNITS
About Learning Units
Learning Units enable Instructors to set a structured path for progressing through content within a
course. This allows Students to view content in an intuitive, self-paced style. All types of content,
such as items, Assignment, and Assessments may be included in a Learning Unit. The Instructor
may allow Students to access content in a Learning Unit nonlinearly or force them to view it
sequentially. For example, a Learning Unit on Shakespeare is created, including files, Assignments
and an Assessment. The Instructor may require Students to proceed through the Learning Unit in a
specific order or they may allow Students to view the contents in any order.
Content within a Learning Unit is added and managed just like content in a folder. The Learning
Unit is a shell to which other content, such as files, is added. Learning Units can be modified like
any other item within a Content Area.
Add a Learning Unit
Follow the steps below to add a Learning Unit to a course Content area.
1.
Select a Content Area, such as Course Documents, on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Learning Unit in the drop-down list on the Action Bar and click Go.
3.
Complete the Add Learning Unit page and click Submit.
Create a Learning Unit slide show
After a Learning Unit is added to a Content Area, a slide show within it may be created. The slide
show will allow users to view the content of the Learning Unit, sequentially.
1.
Open the Content Area that contains the Learning Unit.
2.
Click the name of the Learning Unit to open it.
3.
Select Add File in the Action Bar. The Add File page is used to add files to a Learning
Unit and create a slideshow. This includes Course Links, links to local files and links to
files in the Blackboard Content System to the Learning Unit. This option may be used
multiple times to add multiple files to a Learning Unit.
4.
Use the numbers to the left of each item to order the content. If the Learning Unit is
viewed sequentially, this is the order in which the content appears.
Sequential and non-sequential Learning Units
Learning Units may be viewed sequentially or non-sequentially. If sequential viewing is enforced,
Students will view the Learning Unit in the order items within it are listed. Students will not be able
to advance to a page within the unit without having viewed the previous page. If sequential viewing
is not enforced, items in the Learning Unit may be viewed in any order from the Contents page.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 77 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
TESTS
About Tests in Content Areas
Tests are on-line evaluations that can be used to measure a Student’s understanding of the course.
Test properties, such as availability and presentation options, are managed through the Content
Area where the Test is added. For information on building Tests see the section on How to Create
an Assessment.
NOTE: Instructors may view and grade Tests submitted by Students in the
Gradebook, Tests submitted by Students may not be viewed or graded from the
Content Area where the Test is posted.
Add a Test to a Content Area
Follow the steps below to add a Test to a Content Area:
1.
Select a Content Area, such as Course Documents, on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Test on the Action Bar.
There are two options for adding a test on the Add Test page.
•
Create a New Test – Click Create.
•
Select an existing Test – Select a Test in the Add Test box and click Submit.
After a Test is added to a Content Area, the Modify Test page appears. This page includes links to
the Test Canvas page, to modify the Test itself, and to the Test Options page. The Test Options
page includes options for setting the availability, feedback, and presentation of the Test
NOTE: Settings on the Survey Options page are the same as the Test Options
page, with the exception of Survey Feedback.
Warning: A warning appears if any Students have
already taken a Test when the Modify the Test option
is selected. Certain areas of the Test will not be available
for modification if the Test has already been taken by
Students.
If the Instructor modifies a Test after a Student has
submitted it, the Student will view the new, modified Test
when they view their grade and feedback. They will not
view the original Assessment they completed.
Remove a deployed Assessment
When an Assessment is removed from a Content Area it is deleted from that Content Area and the
details of any Student attempts are deleted. The Assessment will still be available in the Test
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 78 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
Manager or Survey Manager. Grades can be preserved, but the details of the Student attempts will
be lost.
Removing an Assessment from a Content Area does not delete the Assessment from the system.
The Assessment must be removed from the Test Manager or Survey Manager to completely delete
it from the course.
TIP: If any Students have already taken an Assessment be cautious and
consider the consequences before removing the Assessment . It is
recommended that an Assessment first be made Unavailable before
considering the more drastic step of removing the Assessment.
Follow the steps below to remove an Assessment from a Content Area:
1.
Open the Course area from the Control Panel.
2.
Locate the Assessment and click Remove next to the Assessment.
A warning appears. Click Yes to continue.
If a Student has not yet attempted the Assessment, the Assessment will be removed from the
Course area. The Assessment is still in the Test or Survey Manager. If a Student has attempted the
Assessment, please continue to Step 5.
Select the appropriate option and click Submit.
•
Preserve - This option removes the Assessment from the Course area. Any Grades in the
Gradebook related to this Assessment will remain but the attempt itself will be deleted.
In this instance, the grade stays but the Assessment and any attempts are removed. It will
not be possible to view any of the Student’s responses to questions. This can have
serious consequences, for example, if an essay question still needs to be graded, it will
not be possible to do so after removing the Assessment because the details of the attempt
were
removed.
It is important to note that if the Assessment is deployed again, it is done as a new
Assessment. There is no connection or shared data between the first and second
deployments and the Gradebook will treat each deployment as separate Gradebook
Items.
•
Remove - This option removes the Assessment from the Course area and erases any
record of the Assessment from the Gradebook. This will destroy all record of Student
performance on the Assessment.
Remove an Assessment from the Test or Survey Manager
Assessments are removed by selecting the corresponding Remove button on the Test or Survey
Manager. An Assessment can only be removed from the Test or Survey Manager if it is not
deployed in a Course area. If a Remove button does not appear for an Assessment in the Test or
Survey Manager, follow the instructions for removing a deployed Assessment before trying to
remove the Assessment from the Test or Survey Manager.
Removing an Assessment from the Test or Survey Manager destroys the Assessment but does not
have any impact on the Gradebook.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 79 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
TEST OPTIONS
About Test Options
Test Options allow the Instructor to modify the name and description of a Test, as well as, set up
the availability, presentation, and feedback for a Test. These options are only available once a Test
is added to a Content Area.
After a Test is added, the Modify Test page appears, select Modify the Test Options to open the
Test Options page. To make modifications to existing Test Options select Modify next to the Test in
the Content Area.
Modify Test Availability
Test availability may only be set after a Test has been added to a Content Area. Availability is
managed on the Test Options page.
NOTE: When an Assessment is unavailable it is deployed to a Content
Area but a link does not appear to Students. The unavailable
Assessment can be seen when accessing the Course area through the
Control Panel.
The following are descriptions of the Test Availability options:
O PTION
D ESCRIPTION
Make the link available
Select Yes to make a link to this
Assessment appear to Students. If this
option is set to No, it will not appear to
Students. Instructors may make the link
available, then use the Display After and
Display Until fields to limit the amount of
time the link appears.
Create an announcement for this Test
Select Yes to create an Announcement
about the Test. The Announcement will
include the date and state “an Assessment
has been made available in [Course area
that includes the link to the Assessment]”.
This Announcement will appear in the
course Announcements.
Allow multiple attempts
This option allows Students to take the
Test multiple times. The status of multiple
attempts is displayed to Students at the top
of the Assessment. The grade for the most
recent attempt is recorded and appears in
the Gradebook.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 80 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
O PTION
D ESCRIPTION
Force Completion
Students must complete the Assessment
the first time it is launched if Force
Completion is selected. Students may not
exit the Assessment and continue working
on it at a later date. The Save button is
available for Students to save the
Assessment as they work through it, but
they may not exit and re-enter the
Assessment.
If the Force Completion option is enabled,
it is noted and explained to Students at the
top of the Assessment.
If Force Completion is not enabled,
Students may save their progress and
complete the Assessment at another time.
Set Timer
Select this check box to set a time limit for
finishing the Assessment. If this option is
selected, enter the amount of time to allow
for the Test in the hours and minutes
boxes below. The time elapsed is
displayed to the Student during the
Assessment. A one-minute warning is also
displayed as Students approach the time
limit.
Display After
Select the date and time when the Test will
become available to Students. This field is
optional; the Instructor may control
availability through the Make the link
available option without setting specific
dates.
Display Until
Select the date and time the Test will be
made unavailable to Students. This field
may be left blank.
Password
Select this check box to require a password
for Students to access this Assessment. If
this check box is selected, enter a password
in the field below. Passwords cannot be
longer than 15 characters. Passwords are
case sensitive.
Unavailable Assessments
There is a difference between unavailable Assessments and removed Assessments. Removed
Assessments have been removed from the Test or Survey Manager. Unavailable Assessments are
deployed to a Course area but a link does not appear to Students. The Assessment can be seen
when accessing the Course area through the Control Panel.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 81 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
Assessment availability is managed on the Test Options page. Assessment availability can be
limited to a specific time period by setting the Display After and Display Until fields. The availability
can also be open ended by setting only a start date or only an end date. If the link to the
Assessment is available, but neither date is set, the Assessment is immediately and always
available.
Modify Test Feedback
The Test feedback mode determines the type of results users receive after a Test is submitted.
F EEDBACK
MODE
D ESCRIPTION
Score only
Present the final score to Students.
Detailed Results
Present both the Student’s answers and
the final score to Students. This option
displays the points for each question as
well as the points possible.
Show correct answers
Present the Student’s answers, the correct
answers, and the final score.
Detailed results, correct answers and
feedback
Present the Student’s answers, the correct
answers, the final score, and question
feedback to the Student.
Differences between Test feedback and Survey Feedback
When a Test is deployed, four options for Test Feedback appear on the Test Options page.
•
Score Only – Only the final score is presented.
•
Detailed Results – Allows users to see their answers, whether they are correct and the
final score. The correct answers are not presented.
•
Show correct answers – Allows users to see their answers, the correct answers and the
final score.
•
Detailed Results, Correct Answers and Feedback – Allows users to see their answers, the
correct answers, feedback for the questions and the final score.
When a Survey is deployed, only two options are available:
•
Status only – Allows Students to see if the Survey is complete or incomplete
•
Detailed Results – Allows users to see the answers they submitted.
Modify Test presentation
There are a number of options for presenting Tests to Students. These options may be modified on
the Test Options page.
The following are descriptions of each option:
O PTION
D ESCRIPTION
All at Once
Present the entire Assessment on one
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 82 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
O PTION
D ESCRIPTION
screen.
One at a Time
Display one question at a time. The screen
includes navigation tools to move between
questions. The Submit button will only
appear on the last page of the Test.
Prohibit Backtracking
Prevent Students from returning to
questions they have already answered. If
backtracking is prohibited, the buttons <<,
<, or >> do not appear to Students during
the test. These buttons will appear if
backtracking is not prohibited.
Randomize Questions
Display questions in a random order each
time the Assessment is taken.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 83 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ASSIGNMENTS
About Assignments
Assignments allow Instructors to create coursework and manage the grades and feedback for each
Student separately. Instructors may create Assignments that lists the name, point value and
description of the Assignment; files may also be attached. After an Assignment is added to a
Content Area, Students may access the Assignment, complete it in a separate file, and send it back
to the Instructor. The Instructor may respond to each Student separately, sending comments about
their individual Assignment and attaching files, if necessary.
NOTE: Once a Student completes and submits an Assignment the
Instructor may access this file in the Gradebook.
Add an Assignment
Follow the steps below to add an Assignment to a Content Area:
1.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents, from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Assignment from the Action Bar.
3.
Complete the Add Assignment page and click Submit.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 84 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
TOOL LINKING
About Tool Linking
Links to Tools can be placed anywhere in a course that content can. Tools such as Discussion
Board forums and Virtual Classroom sessions can exist in the same Content Area as content such
as Learning Unit slideshows, files, and Assessments. Adding tools to folders creates a seamless
experience for users because all materials related to a certain subject can be accessed from the
same location.
Instructors may also explain the context of the Tool when it is added to the Content Area, including
a description of what it is used for and attached files. For example, the Instructor may add a link to
a Discussion Board, explain that users should participate in the forum during a specific week, and
attach an article they should discuss.
Add a tool to a Content Area
Follow the steps below to add a tool to a Content Area:
1.
Select a Content Area, such as Course Documents, in the Control Panel.
2.
From the main Content Area page, or from any nested folder, select a tool from the dropdown list and click Go. The Add Tool page will appear.
3.
Link to the tool, an instance of the tool, or create a new instance. For example, link to the
Discussion Board page where users can select a forum, link to an existing forum directly,
or create a new forum and link to it. Click Submit to add the tool to the folder.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 85 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
COPY AND MOVE CONTENT
About Copy and Move
Instructors are able to copy or move content and place it in another area within the same course or
in another course. Entire folders and Learning Units can also be copied. Instructors must have an
Instructor role in the destination course when content is moved or copied to another course.
Instructors can choose whether to delete an item after it is copied (in a move operation) or to also
keep it in its original place (in a copy operation).
Copy and Move are not available with Bb Learning System – Basic.
NOTE: Folders may not be copied from other parts of a course into a Learning
Unit.
Copy or Move content
Follow the steps below to copy or move a piece of content:
1.
Open the Content Area that holds the piece of content from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Copy next to the content. (If Copy does not appear, this option in not available).
The Copy or Move Item page appears.
3.
Complete the Copy or Move Item page with the following information:
•
Destination Course: Select a destination from the drop-down list for the item. Only those
courses in which the Instructor has an Instructor role appear in the list.
•
Destination Folder: Select Browse to view the Course Map. Select a folder on the
Course Map and click Submit.
•
Remove item after copy: If the item is being copied (it will exist in multiple places) select
No. If the item is being moved to a different location elect Yes. If Yes is selected the item
is removed from the current Content Area.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 86 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
THE OPEN STANDARDS CONTENT PLAYER
About the Content Player Building Block
The Content Player Building Block allows an Instructor to add content that conforms to SCORM,
IMS, or NLN standards to a course. Instructors see IMS, SCORM, and NLN (depending on which
the Administrator has made available) as additional types of content items, available in the Action
Bar dropdown list in Content Areas.
Using the Content Player in a Course
Instructors and users interact with IMS, SCORM, and NLN content just as they would other types of
content. From the users’ perspective, IMS, SCORM, or NLN content items are accessed in the
same way as any other course content. IMS, SCORM, or NLN content can even be added to a
Learning Unit.
When adding SCORM, IMS, or NLN data, the Instructor can make selections about navigation and
display. If the Instructor wishes to add an item to the Gradebook, this can also be done from the
Add Content page. In addition to giving a grade in the Gradebook, when a user interacts with the
content, the Instructor can view the user’s progress in the Gradebook including total viewing time
and completion status.
SCORM, NLN and IMS Packages
The Open Standards Content Player Building Block supports the SCORM standard and the IMS
standard for Web content, as well as NLN Content, which conforms to SCORM and IMS.
The content that is created to meet these specifications is called a package because all the files
are gathered in a zipped format. The Content Player unzips the package and accesses
components as they are needed.
NOTE: The Instructor does not need to know what type of package is being
uploaded. The Content Player will make this determination in order to play the
content correctly.
IMS Content
The Content Player Building Block supports content that conforms to the IMS Content and
Packaging 1.1.2 standard with the webcontent attribute. When adding this content type to a course,
it is useful to note that most of these types of packages do not track User Attempt Details.
Otherwise, no major differences will be seen.
Further information about IMS Content can be found at: http://www.imsproject.org
SCORM Content
The Content Player Building Block supports content that conforms to the SCORM 1.2 standard and
the SCORM 2005 standard. The Instructor does not need to determine ahead of time whether the
content is designed as 1.2 or 2005 compliant, as both types can be played.
Further information about SCORM Content can be found at: http://www.adlnet.org
NLN Content
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 87 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
The Content Player Building Block supports NLN content, which conforms to SCORM and IMS
standards. The United Kingdom NLN Materials Team is responsible for commissioning and
developing e-learning materials for the NLN, and offers advice on best practices in integrating the
NLN materials into teaching and learning schemes.
Further information about NLN Content can be found at: http://www.nln.ac.uk/
Who Creates the Content?
The Content packages are created to comply with the individual standards. Each institution may
have a policy on which content it uses and where the content comes from. Some institutions build
their own SCORM or IMS packages, and several private companies also produce the content.
Some content may also be available for general use.
NOTE: Once the user begins working with the SCORM, IMS or NLN content,
internal navigation and interaction is determined by the content packages, not
the Blackboard Learning System.
Managing the Content Types
The availability of the Content Types can be controlled on the Manage Tools page from the Control
Panel. The Content Types are controlled on the Content Type Availability page. Depending on the
Administrator’s settings, one or all of the Content Player Content types may be available for the
Instructor to use.
Attempt Data
When a Gradebook Item is associated with the SCORM, IMS or NLN content item, the Instructor
will be able to view data related to the users’ interactions with the content. This is called Attempt
Data.
The details may include the total time the user has viewed each learning object, the completion
status, responses to any questions contained in the package, and whether the response was
correct. The purpose of the attempt data is to help the Instructor in determining a score for the
Gradebook item.
To access this information on the Attempt Details page:
1.
Click Gradebook.
2.
Click on the user attempt, the Modify Grade page loads.
3.
Click View on the Modify Grade page, the Attempt Details page loads.
NOTE: Not all packages are designed to track all data. If the package does not
provide the information to the Blackboard Learning System, the data will show as
N/A.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 88 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Instructor Manual
Page 89 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
SYLLABUS
About the Syllabus
A Syllabus is a type of content that may be added to any Content Area. Simply link to an existing
document that will serve as a Syllabus, or create a new Syllabus using the template provided. The
Instructor may attach a file from their local computer, or link to a file in their Content Collection if the
Content Collection has been enabled by the Administrator. Creating a new Syllabus allows the user
to pre-build as many lessons as needed, or build lessons one at a time. Additionally, the user can
apply custom designs to the Syllabus.
TIP: When using the Syllabus tool to create a new Syllabus, the user may
first create a custom Content Area just for the Syllabus. Adding the
Syllabus to it’s own Content Area allows easy access and will not
compete for attention with anything else in the Content Area.
Add a Syllabus
Follow the steps below to add a Syllabus to a course Content Area.
1.
Select a Content Area, such as Course Documents, on the Control Panel or in the Edit
View of the page.
2.
Select Syllabus in the drop-down list on the Action Bar and click Go.
3.
Complete the Add Syllabus page and click Submit.
4.
If the option to Create a new Syllabus was selected, see more information in Creating a
new Syllabus.
5.
If the option to Use an Existing File was selected, the file will be attached to the Add Item
page. For more information, see the documentation for Add Item.
Use an existing file or use the Syllabus Builder
Two options are available for adding a Syllabus; attach an existing file or create a Syllabus using
the Syllabus Builder.
Attaching a file prompts the Instructor to select a file from their local computer. Linking to an item in
the Content Collection allows the Instructor to select an item in the Content Collection. Either of
these options will create a Syllabus that simply opens the attached or linked document. No design
options are available for this selection.
Selecting to use the Syllabus Builder takes to the user to the Syllabus creation page. The Syllabus
Builder allows the user to batch create lesson shells, and apply custom designs to the Syllabus.
The lessons may be added, modified, reordered or removed at anytime. The design options may
be changed even after the Syllabus has been created.
Create a new Syllabus
The first section of the Syllabus creation page provides three text boxes with suggested names for
the content: Description, Learning Objectives and Required Materials. The titles are editable and
any content may be included or not included in the text boxes.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 90 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
The user can select a design option and customize the colors and patterns of the design. For more
information, see Designing a Syllabus.
Lesson shells, which are placeholders for a set number of lessons the user wishes to add to the
Syllabus, may be created by selecting Build Lessons and entering the number of lessons to be
created.
NOTE: Build Lessons is only available upon creation. Once a Syllabus has
been created, the user should create lessons by clicking Add Lesson on
the Action bar of the Lessons page. See Syllabus Lessons for more
information.
Clicking Submit takes the user to the next page for creating, modifying, ordering and removing
Lessons. See Syllabus Lessons for more information.
Designing a Syllabus
The Syllabus provides six style options: Document image, Notepad, Modern, Classic,
Contemporary, or None. Each style is unique, with a dramatic header font and thin or thick borders
around the content. Some styles allow the user to select from a list of patterns for the background.
The table below describes the design and optional settings for each style.
S YLLABUS S TYLES
Style
Description
Color options
Document image
Mainly white with an image of a
document faintly visible in the
background.
Headers, borders, text
Notepad
Similar to the appearance of a piece of
notebook paper, the background
contains faint blue horizontal lines.
Headers, borders, text
Modern
A thin border surrounds the entire
Syllabus.
Headers,
borders,
text,
background (color or pattern)
Classic
A wider frame around the entire
Syllabus.
Headers, borders, text, frame,
background (color or pattern)
Contemporary
A wider frame surrounds the content,
but is separated into two boxes by the
Lessons header.
Headers, borders, text, frame,
background (color or pattern)
None
The item is styled like other content
items with no borders or frames.
Headers, text
Syllabus Lessons
Submitting the Create Syllabus page takes the user to the next part of the Syllabus Builder, the
Lessons page. This is also the page that appears when Modify is selected on the Content Area
page once the Syllabus has been created.
The content on the Lessons page is displayed with the design chosen on the Create Syllabus page.
The Modify button at the top of the header information directs the user to the Create Syllabus
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 91 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
page. Clicking Modify allows the user to change the description and other text at the top of the
Syllabus, as well as the style and content options such as date of availability.
Lessons are listed below the header information. Lessons may be added, removed, modified or
reordered from this list. To add a lesson, click Add Lesson on the Action bar. Lessons may include
a date and time, or use the checkboxes to not display a date or time.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 92 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADAPTIVE RELEASE
About Adaptive Release
Adaptive Release of Content provides controls to release content to users based on a set of rules
provided by the Instructor. The rules may be related to availability, date and time, individual users
and user groups (such as course Groups), scores or attempts on any Gradebook item, or review
status of another item in the course.
This feature may be used by all Instructors and course developers. Some Instructors and course
developers may choose to take advantage of advanced rule functionality to create sophisticated
combinations of release rules on items. Others may utilize the basic rule functionality to release
content to specific users or groups and/or to allow users to view content based on their
performance on an assignment.
The following options are available:
•
Adaptive Release – Create basic rules for an item. Only one rule per item may be created.
•
Adaptive Release: Advanced – Create advanced rules for an item. Multiple rules may be
created.
•
User Progress – View the details on an item for all users in a course. This page includes
information on whether the item is visible to the user and whether the user has marked the
item as reviewed.
Adaptive Release rules and criteria
An Adaptive Release rule consists of a set of criteria that defines the visibility of a content item to
users. Criteria are the parts that make up the rule. For example, date and membership are two
types of different criteria. Each content item may have multiple rules, and each rule may consist of
multiple criteria. To view an item, a user must meet all of the requirements of the rule. This means
that if a rule has multiple criteria, the user must meet all criteria before the item is available.
For example, the Instructor may add an Assignment to a course. One rule for this Assignment may
allow all users in Group A to view the Assignment after a specific date. This rule would consist of
Membership criteria and Date criteria. Another rule for this Assignment may allow all users in
Group B to view the Assignment once they had completed Homework #1. This rule would consist of
Membership criteria and Gradebook criteria.
NOTE: Only one Membership criteria and one Date criteria may be created
for each rule. Multiple Gradebook criteria and Review Status criteria may
be added to each rule.
Enable and disable the Adaptive Release feature
The System Administrator controls the availability of the Adaptive Release feature. If this feature is
made available, course developers may add either basic or advanced Adaptive Release Rule.
If the Adaptive Release tool is disabled by the Administrator, all rules that have been created will
disappear. Also, Adaptive Release related links on the Manage page will no longer appear. If the
tool is later re-enabled, the links on the Manage page will reappear and any data associated with
Adaptive Release (such as the rules) will be saved. Any Adaptive Release rules that had previously
been set also re-appear.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 93 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Visibility of items with Adaptive Release rules
Once any Adaptive Release rules have been established for an item, visibility of that item is
restricted to those users who meet the criteria of those rules.
For example, the Instructor creates a content item called “Introduction” and makes the item
available in Course Documents. At this point, all course users would be able to see Introduction.
The Instructor then creates a rule restricting the item to Group A users. Now, only members of
Group A can see Introduction—all other course users (who are not a member of Group A) do not
see Introduction. The Instructor then adds other criteria to this rule, restricting it to Group A
members who have received at least an 80 on Test #1. Now, only members of Group A who have
also received an 80 or greater on the Test #1 will see Introduction. All other course users, including
Group A members who scored less than an 80 on the Pre-Test, will not see Introduction.
If no Adaptive Release Rules have been created, the item is available to all users in the course
depending on the item availability and date / time availability set on the Add Item page.
View availability of an item on User Progress page
Instructors may create one or more Adaptive Release rules which narrow the availability of a
content item. It may be difficult to remember which users in a course may access each piece of
content. The User progress page displays details on the visibility of a content item and the Adaptive
Release rules pertaining to it. For example, this page lists the visibility of an item on a user-by-user
basis. If Review Status is enabled for the item, an icon is displayed to show whether the user has
reviewed the item or not along with a date and time stamp for when the review was registered for
that user.
If no Adaptive Release rules have been created for that item, the visibility column is based simply
on availability of the item itself. For example, if the item is available, the Visible icon is displayed for
all users.
Differences between basic Adaptive Release and Advanced Adaptive Release
Advanced Adaptive Release allows users to create multiple rules per item. If a user wants to create
different criteria for different users on the same item, the user will need to create more than one
rule. For example, if different rules apply for different Groups in a course Advanced Adaptive
Release is used. The Instructor may set up a rule for Group A that enabled all users in the Group to
view an item once they receive an 85 on a Test. The Instructor may set up a separate rule for
Group B that enables them to see the same content item after they receive an 80 on the Test.
Unavailable items and Adaptive Release rules
Item availability set on the Add Item page supersedes all Adaptive Release rules. If the item is
unavailable, it is unavailable to all users regardless of any rules established. This allows course
developers to build out their rules and only make items available when they are finished with rule
creation.
View content with rules through the course
If Instructors view Content Areas through the course as a Student would (as opposed to through
the Control Panel or Quick Edit), their view is based on item availability and Adaptive Release
rules. For example, if Adaptive Release is used to make an item available to a Group, and they are
not a member of the Group, they will not see the item if they access it through the Course Menu.
The same is true for unavailable items. If an item is added to a course, but is not made available,
the Instructor will not see it when they access the Content Area through the Course Menu.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 94 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
ADAPTIVE RELEASE FUNCTIONS
Add a basic Adaptive Release rule
The Basic Adaptive Release rule allows the user to add and modify one rule for a single piece of
content. This single rule may have multiple criteria. For example, the rule may require the user to
meet both date criteria and review status criteria before the content is available.
NOTE: Use Advanced Adaptive Release rules to add multiple rules to a single
piece of content.
Follow the steps below to add a basic Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release. The Adaptive Release page appears.
4.
Complete one or more sections of the Adaptive Release page and select Submit.
Add an Advanced Adaptive Release rule
Advanced Adaptive Release allows Instructors to add multiple rules to a single content item. If
multiple rules are created, the content is visible to the user if any of the rules are met. Each rule
may have multiple criteria. For example, one rule may allow users in Group A with a score above
an 85 on a Test to view the content item. Another rule for the same item may allow users in Group
B to view the same content item only after a specific date.
Follow the steps below to add an advanced Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Select Add Rule in the Action Bar. The Add Rule page appears. Enter a name for the rule
and click Submit.
5.
Use the options in the Action Bar on the Manage Criteria page to build the rule. For
example, select Add Date to add date criteria to the rule. When that criteria is complete,
another option in the Action Bar may be selected to build on the rule. Select OK when the
rule is complete.
6.
Repeat Step 4 thru Step 6 to add multiple criteria to an item.
Copy an Adaptive Release rule
Instructors may find it beneficial to copy an Adaptive Release rule, rather than creating a new one
from scratch. Once the rule is copied the name may be changed and the rule modified. Rules may
only be copied within a single content item; a rule from one content item may not be copied to
another content item.
Follow the steps below to copy an Adaptive Release Rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 95 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
2.
Select Manage next to the content item with the rule you would like to copy. The Manage
page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Click the checkbox next to the rule you would like to copy and select Copy in the Action
Bar.
5.
An exact replica of the rule appears at the bottom of the list. It has the same name as the
original rule with ‘Copy of’ in the beginning.
6.
Click Modify next to the new rule to make changes to the name or criteria.
Modify an Adaptive Release rule
Rules are managed and modified from the Adaptive Release page. The criteria of a rule and the
name of a rule are managed separately.
Follow the steps below to modify the name of a rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Select Manage next to the Rule that needs to be updated. The Manage Rule page
appears. Modify the Rule Name and select Submit.
Follow the steps below to modify the criteria of an advanced rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Select Modify next to the Rule that needs to be updated. The Manage Criteria page
appears. Criteria may be added, modified, and removed. Select OK when the changes are
complete.
5.
Repeat Step 4 to change any additional rules related to the content item.
Follow the steps below to modify a basic Adaptive Release Rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release. The Adaptive Release page appears.
4.
Make any necessary changes and select Submit.
NOTE: These steps may also be used to modify a rule with one criteria
created on the Advanced Adaptive Release page.
Remove an Adaptive Release rule
Follow the steps below to remove an Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 96 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
2.
Select Manage next to the content item with the rule you would like to remove. The
Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
Click the checkbox next to the rule you would like to remove. Multiple rules may be
selected. Click Remove.
NOTE: Basic Adaptive Release rules are also removed from the Adaptive
Release: Advanced page.
Adaptive Release rules during copy, archive, and export
Adaptive Release rules and user progress information are only included during a full course copy
with users and during archive and restore operations. Rules and user progress information are not
saved during a copy of course materials into a new course or during a copy of course materials into
an existing course. They are also not saved during export and import operations.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 97 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADAPTIVE RELEASE CRITERIA
About Adaptive Release Criteria
Criteria are the parts that define an Adaptive Release rule. Instructors have the option of applying
one or more criteria to each rule. For example, one rule may make content available after a specific
date, while another rule, with multiple criteria, may make content available to a course Group after
a specific date. There are a number of different types of criteria available to Instructors.
The following is a brief description of each available criteria:
C RITERIA
D ESCRIPTION
Date / Time
Display content based on a date or time. Options include:
• after a specific date
• until a specific date
• after a specific date and until a specific date
Username
Display content to one or more users.
Group
Display content to members of one or more Groups in a course.
Gradebook:
Item
with at least one
attempt
Display content based on a recorded attempt by the user. For
example, the user has completed the Test or a grade has been
entered for an Assignment.
Gradebook:
Item
with
a
specific
score
Display content based on a required score. Options include:
• after a specific date
• less than or equal to
• equal to
• greater than
• greater than or equal to
Gradebook:
Item
with
a
score
between X and Y
Display content based on a range of scores. For example, if a
Student scores between 85 and 100 on an exam.
Review Status an
item
Display content to the user only after an associated item has been
marked Reviewed by the user.
About Date criteria
Date criteria enables content to be displayed according to date and time. Content may be displayed
after a specific date, until a specific date, or after a specific date and until a specific date. For
example, the Instructor may use the date criteria to release lecture notes only after the lecture has
occurred or the date criteria option could be used give one Group, such as Students with learning
disabilities, more time to access content than another Group would receive.
Dates for availability may be set when the item is created or modified under options or through a
Date criteria rule. The Instructor may decide to use both the date restrictions on the Modify page
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 98 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
and the Date criteria rule. For example, the item can be made available on the Modify page from
December 1 – December 30. Then the item may be made available to one small group of users
from December 1 – December 15 and another small group of users from December 16 –
December 30.
NOTE: If the date is changed on the item itself, for example on the Modify
Item page, and date criteria already exist, a warning message appears.
The same is true if the user attempts to add date criteria and a date for the
item has been set on the Add or Modify page.
Add Date criteria to a rule
Date criteria fields are filled out with the same information for both basic Adaptive Release rules
and advanced Adaptive Release rules. Instructors may add additional criteria to a rule, in addition
to date criteria, to further narrow the availability of an item.
Follow the steps below to add date criteria to an advanced Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
To add a new rule, select Add Rule in the Action Bar. The Add Rule page appears. Enter
a name for the rule and click Submit. Alternatively, the criteria may be added to an
existing rule. In this case, select Modify next to a rule on the Adaptive Release page.
5.
Select Date in the Action Bar. The Date page appears.
D ATE C RITERIA
S ETTING
Display an item
after a specific date
Click the checkbox next to Display After. Select a date and time in
the drop-down lists below. The item will appear to users after this
date and time.
Display and item
until a specific date
Click the checkbox next to Display Until. Select a date and time in
the drop-down lists below. The item will appear to users until this
date and time.
Display an item
after a specific date
and until a specific
date
Click the checkbox next to Display After and Display Until. Select a
date and time in the drop-down lists below. The item will appear to
users between these dates and times.
About Membership Criteria
Membership criteria allow content to be displayed according to username and course Group. The
Instructor may set up criteria that use one or both of these options; the Instructor may make this
item available to a course Group, or the Instructor may make this item available to a course Group
and other specific individuals.
Make content available to specific users
Membership criteria are useful for making content available to a specific user. For example, if a
Student requests a way to earn more points for class the Instructor may agree, but decide to not
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 99 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
offer this option to the entire course. The Instructor creates an extra credit content item and only
releases it to the single Student through the Membership criteria.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 100 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
Make content available to Groups
Membership criteria may be used to manage content for Groups within a course. For example, a
class is divided into three groups and each group has a different assignment. They are instructed to
learn the topic and then present the material to the entire class. The Instructor has materials for
each Group. The Instructor loads the material for Group 1 as content items, and releases the
material only to Group 1. Then the Instructor loads the material for Group 2 as content items, and
releases that material only to Group 2. This same process is used for Group 3. When a Group
presents the material to the class, the Instructor may then change the release rule on that material
so it becomes available to the entire class. (Alternatively, if the Instructor knows the date of
presentation ahead of time, the Date criteria may be used to make the content available for the rest
of the class.)
Add Membership criteria to a rule
Membership criteria fields are filled out with the same information for both basic Adaptive Release
rules and advanced Adaptive Release rules. Instructors may add additional criteria to a rule, in
addition to Membership criteria, to further narrow the availability of an item.
1.
Follow the steps below to add Membership criteria to an advanced Adaptive Release rule:
2.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
3.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
4.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
5.
To add a new rule, select Add Rule in the Action Bar. The Add Rule page appears. Enter
a name for the rule and click Submit. Alternatively, the criteria may be added to an
existing rule. In this case, select Modify next to a rule on the Adaptive Release page.
6.
Select Membership in the Action Bar. The Membership page appears.
M EMBERSHIP
C RITERIA
S ETTING
Make content
available to specific
users
In the Username field enter one or more usernames, separated by
commas or click Browse to search the system. Use the Search for
User window to search for and select usernames to add to the field.
Selected Usernames appear at the bottom of the section.
Make content
available to Groups
All Groups in the course appear in Available Course Groups, even
those that are unavailable. Use the arrows to move Groups from
the Not Selected field to the Selected field. Content is displayed to
all of the Groups that appear in the Selected field.
About Gradebook criteria
Gradebook criteria may be used to release content based on item attempt and score. A number of
different score values may be selected, including the following:
•
A score greater than a set value
•
A score less than a set value
•
A score that equals a specific value
•
A score that falls within a range of values
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 101 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
Make content available based on Gradebook attempt
Gradebook criteria are useful for Instructors who want to make content visibility dependent on
attempts made by Students on Assessments or Assignments. An Instructor may prepare a pre-test
for Students to prepare for the final. The idea is for the Students to pre-test themselves before
seeing the review materials, to know how much they recall without extra studying. Using
Gradebook criteria the Instructor creates the review materials, but only releases it to Students who
have attempted the pre-test test at least once.
Another example of attempt based criteria is end-of-term surveys. Some institutions require end-ofterm surveys about the course, before the final exam is taken. In this case, the Instructor can make
the final exam item available only after the survey is attempted at least once.
Make content available based on Gradebook score
Gradebook criteria may be used to make content available based on the score a Student receives.
Many courses rely on progression, such as foreign languages, where Students must learn one
topic before moving onto another. If an Instructor is about to teach advanced verb conjugation, but
wants Students to have passed the assignment on basic verb conjugation, the Instructor can create
a rule that allows only those Students who have received at least a 70 on the basic verb
conjugation assignment to view the advanced verb conjugation material.
Instructors can also establish a range of values for content release, such as releasing an item only
to users who scored between a 70 and 80 and might need some remediation, but less remediation
than users who received less than a 70. In this case, the Instructor creates two content items and
releases one to users who fall into the 70-80 range and releases the other to Students who
received less than a 70.
Add Gradebook criteria to a rule
Gradebook criteria fields are filled out with the same information for both basic Adaptive Release
rules and advanced Adaptive Release rules. Instructors may add additional criteria to a rule, in
addition to Gradebook criteria, to further narrow the availability of an item.
TIP: Only one Gradebook item may be selected for each Gradebook criteria.
For example, one criteria may not be used to make an item visible based on
the score of two different Gradebook items. However, multiple Gradebook
criteria may be added to a single Advanced Adaptive Release rule. The
Instructor may set up one criteria that makes Project A available after Test
#1 is complete and another criteria in the same rule that makes Project A
available after Test #2 is complete. In this example, only Students who have
completed Test #1 and Test #2 may view Project A.
Follow the steps below to add Gradebook criteria to an advanced Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
To add a new rule, select Add Rule in the Action Bar. The Add Rule page appears. Enter
a name for the rule and click Submit. Alternatively, the criteria may be added to an
existing rule. In this case, select Modify next to a rule on the Adaptive Release page.
5.
Select Gradebook in the Action Bar. The Membership page appears.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 102 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
6.
Select the Gradbook item this criteria is based on in the Select Gradebook Item dropdown list. Only one item may be selected.
G RADEBOOK
C RITERIA
S ETTING
Make content
available based on
Gradebook attempt
Select the option Item has at least one attempt.
Make content
available based on
less than, greater
than, or equal to
score
Use the options in the Score drop-down list to select Less Than,
Greater Than, or Equal To. Enter a number in the field for the
score this criteria is based on; this must be an integer.
Make content
available for a
score within a
range of values
Select the option Score between _ and _. Enter the range of values
in the fields within this option.
About Review Status criteria
Review Status criteria is used to release content based on the user’s review of a specific content
item. For example, the Instructor may create criteria that makes Assignment #1 available only after
Students have marked Homework #1 reviewed.
Add Review Status criteria to a rule
Review Status criteria fields are filled out with the same information for both basic Adaptive
Release rules and advanced Adaptive Release rules. Instructors may add additional criteria to a
rule, in addition to Review Status, to further narrow the availability of an item. Review Status may
be applied to a Learning Unit but may not be applied to indvidual files within a Learning Unit.
Follow the steps below to add Review Status criteria to an advanced Adaptive Release rule:
1.
Open a Content Area from the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
3.
Select Adaptive Release: Advanced. The Adaptive Release: Advanced page appears.
4.
To add a new rule, select Add Rule in the Action Bar. The Add Rule page appears. Enter
a name for the rule and click Submit. Alternatively, the criteria may be added to an
existing rule. In this case, select Modify next to a rule on the Adaptive Release page.
5.
Select Review Status in the Action Bar. The Review Status page appears.
6.
Select Browse to open the Course Map. Click an item in the Course Map to select it for
Review Status criteria. Review Status will be turned on for this item. Users must mark the
item reviewed before the content including this rule is available.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 103 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
REVIEW STATUS
About Review Status
The Review Status tool allows the Instructor to track user review of specific content items. Once the
Instructor enables the tool for an item, each Student tracks their progress. A Mark Reviewed button
appears on the item when the user opens the Content Area. After reviewing the item, the Student
selects this button to mark it Reviewed. The Instructor may check the status of Student reviews on
the User Progress page.
If the Review Status tool is enabled by the System Administrator, it is on by default in all courses.
Disable Review Status in a course
If the Review Status tool is disabled at the Administrator or course level, the Review Status links on
the Manage page disappear and the Review / Mark Reviewed buttons on the course pages no
longer appear. If the tool is later re-enabled, those links and buttons reappear and any data
associated with Review Status (such as an individual user’s progress) is restored.
Follow the steps below to disable Review Status in a course:
1.
Select Manage Tools under Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Tool Availability on the Manage Tools page. The Tool Availability page appears.
3.
A check appears in the checkbox next to Review Status. Click this checkbox so the check
disappears. Click Submit.
Enable Review Status for an item
When Review Status is enabled for an item a Mark Reviewed button appears next to the item when
the Content Area is opened by the user. The user must select this button to mark the item
Reviewed. Follow the steps below to enable Review Status for an item in a course:
Open the Content Area that includes the item from the Control Panel.
1.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
2.
Select Review Status. The Review Status page appears.
3.
Select Enable and click Submit. The new status appears on the Manage page
underneath the Review Status link.
View the status of user reviews
Once Review Status is enabled for an item, the Instructor may check the status of Student reviews
from the User Progress page or the Performance Dashboard. These pages both indicate whether
or not a Student has marked an item as ‘Reviewed’.
The User Progress page allows the Instructor to see the Review Status of the item for all users in
the course. Follow the steps below to open the User Progress page:
1.
Open the Content Area that includes the item you would like to check from the Control
Panel.
2.
Select Manage next to the content item. The Manage page appears.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 104 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
3.
Select Review Status: User Progress. A check box appears in the Reviewed column
next to each user who has marked the item as Reviewed. The time and date of the review
also appears.
The Performance Dashboard allows the Instructor to see the Review Status of all currently
available items for a single user in the course. Follow the steps below to view the status of the item
on the Performance Dashboard:
1.
Select Performance Dashboard under Assessments on the Control Panel. The
Performance Dashboard appears
2.
Select the number under the Review Status column next to the user in question. The
Review Status page for this user appears. The Instructor may check the Review Status for
each item that has Review Status Enabled, either through an Adaptive Release Rule or
the Review Status option.
OR
Click the Adaptive Release icon to open the Course Map. The Map displays the Review
Status for all items in the course for that user.
NOTE: If the user changes the status of an individual item from Reviewed
to Mark Reviewed, all record of the previous status is erased. The
Instructor will not be alerted to the change other than by seeing the new
status in the User Progress page or in the Performance Dashboard.
Review Status during course copy, archive and export
Review Status settings and user status information are only included during a full course copy with
users and during archive and restore operations. Review Status settings and status information are
not saved during a copy of course materials into a new course or during a copy of course materials
into an existing course. The same is true for export and import operations.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 105 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
USER PROGRESS
About User Progress
The User Progress page tracks the availability and review status for a specific content item. This
page is only available if Adaptive Release or Review Status is enabled. The Instructor may use this
page to view all users in the course, the availability of the item to them, the Review Status, and the
date and time the item was reviewed. If Adaptive Release rules have been created, a rule summary
is also displayed.
View User Progress
The User Progress page lists all enrolled users in a course. A link to each rule at the top of the
page allows the Instructor to view and modify rules for this item.
All columns with unique information in the list may be sorted. Each user’s first and last name,
username, and role are noted. Additionally, the user’s visibility for the item is listed. If the item is
visible to the user an open eye appears in the column. If the item is not visible to the user the eye
appears closed. The Review Status also appears on the page, along with the date the item was
reviewed. This column only appears if Review Status is enabled for the item, either through the
Review Status option or through an Adaptive Release Rule.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 106 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
PERFORMANCE DASHBOARD
About the Performance Dashboard
The Performance Dashboard tool provides a window into all types of user activity in a course or
organization. All users enrolled in the course are listed, with pertinent information about that user’s
progress and activity in the course.
Enable the Performance Dashboard
If the System Administrator has made this tool available, it may be accessed by selecting
Performance Dashboard under Assessments on the Control Panel.
View the Performance Dashboard
Administrators must enable the Performance Dashboard for it to appear in courses. If enabled by
the Administrator, the Performance Dashboard will be on by default in all courses. The
Performance Dashboard is accessed through the Assessment area of the Control Panel. This page
displays the following information
•
Last Name
•
First Name
•
Username
•
Role
•
Date / time of last login
•
Days since last login
•
Review Status - Only displayed if this tool is enabled. Displays how many items have been
reviewed / number of items with Review Status enabled. A detailed view of items may be
opened in a new window.
•
Adaptive Release - Only displayed if this tool is enabled. An overview of the Student path
may be opened in a new window.
•
View Grades - Only displayed if the Gradebook is enabled. Provides links to the
Gradebook: User Grade List page for that user.
•
Users can click Print to open the page in a new window in a printer-friendly format. All
applicable columns are may be sorted.
Understanding the Review Status indicator
The numbers provided in the Review Status column of the Performance Dashboard indicate the
number of items that the Student has marked as Reviewed.
Using Adaptive Release rules in a course creates multiple tracks for Students to progress through.
This allows for the possibility that each Student will have a different requirement for marking certain
items in a course as Reviewed. At any time in a course, items in a Student’s track may or may not
be visible to them. The Performance Dashboard provides an at-this-moment view of the item
availability and the Student’s progress on reviewing items.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 107 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
The Review Status indicator links to a list of the items that the course user sees as Reviewed and
Mark Reviewed in the course.
The Review Status column is only visible if Review Status has been enabled for the course.
Link to Adaptive Release
The Adaptive Release indicator in the Performance Dashboard for each user opens the Course
Map, showing every possible item in the course. Icons beside each item in the Course Map indicate
the visibility of an item to that course user, and the review status of any items with a review
requirement, if applicable.
A D APTIVE R ELEASE
AND
R EVIEW S TATUS
ICONS :
Visible – this item is visible to that course user.
Invisible – this item is not visible to that course user.
Reviewed – this item has been marked as Reviewed by the course user.
Mark Reviewed – this item is displayed as Mark Reviewed to the course user.
The Adaptive Release column is only visible if Adaptive Release has been enabled for the course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 108 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
STATISTICS TRACKING
About Statistics Tracking
Statistics Tracking at the content item level allows Instructors to view detailed statistics on content
item usage for all course users. In addition to the availability and Review Status information
available on the User Progress page, these detailed statistics can help Instructors determine how
many times the particular content item was viewed and exactly when it was accessed. Select
Manage next to an item in a Content area to enable, disable and view Statistics Tracking.
Statistics Tracking is separate from Course Statistics accessed from the Control Panel. Course
Statistics provides information about Content Area access versus the item-by-item access
displayed on the Statistics Tracking page for a content item.
Turning Statistics Tracking On and Off
The Instructor can turn Statistics Tracking on from the Manage page of any content item:
1.
Select Manage next to an item in the Content Area. The current status is displayed on this
page.
2.
Select Statistics Tracking. The Statistics Tracing page appears.
3.
Select Enable/Disable Tracking.
4.
Select Enable to turn tracking on.
To disable Statistics Tracking, follow the same steps as above. In Step 3 select Disable on the
Enable/Disable Tracking page.
NOTE: Statistics are only stored in the database when Statistics Tracking is enabled.
If Statistics Tracking is turned on after some users have accessed the content item,
the record of their access cannot be recovered. Data will only be displayed for those
users who access the content item after Statistics Tracking was turned on.
Viewing Statistics for a Content Item
When Statistics Tracking is enabled, the View Statistics link is active on the Statistics Tracking
page. (This link is displayed, but not in an active state, if Statistics Tracking is not enabled for the
content item.)
Follow the steps below to view statistics for a content item:
1.
Select Manage next to an item in the Content Area. The current status is displayed on this
page.
2.
Select Statistics Tracking. The Statistics Tracking page appears.
3.
Select View Statistics on the Statistics Tracking page.
4.
Select the Time Period for the report
5.
Select the appropriate Users filter: All Users or Selected Users. Press CTRL to select
more than one user from the list.
6.
Select Submit to run the report.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 109 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
The report displays three sections of data: Access by Date, Access by Hour of the Day, and Access
by Day of the Week. The Access by Date section displays information for all enrolled users. Access
information for system guests and unenrolled users (previously enrolled users who were removed
from the course) is displayed under the Guest user. Observer access to content items is not
tracked.
Modifying, Printing and Exporting a Report
To change the report query (to add more users, remove users, or change the date range) select
Change Filter. Modify the Time Period and/or Users selected as appropriate and select Submit to
run the report.
To send the report to a printer in a printer-friendly format, select Print. The report will be printed
exactly as it is displayed on the screen.
To export the report data for further, off-line data analysis, select Export Data. Save the data using
the File Download pop-up windows that appears. The comma-separated values (CSV) file can now
be opened in any statistical analysis program (such as Microsoft Excel).
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 110 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 5—COURSE TOOLS
Overview
Course Tools are communication and collaboration tools that enhance interaction between users.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Announcements
Provides details for posting important information about the course,
such as assignment due dates, content changes or guest
speakers.
Course Calendar
Provides all the details for posting course-related events on a
Calendar.
Staff Information
Describes how to post information about Instructors, Teaching
Assistants, and guest speakers for the course.
Tasks
Explains how to organize course projects, priorities, and details.
Send Email
Provides information on how to send email to other participants or
groups of participants within a course.
Digital Drop Box
Provides information for exchanging files between the Instructor
and course participants.
Messages
Explains how messages are sent to users within a course.
Glossary
Explains how to create and modify the course Glossary. The
Glossary may also be uploaded and downloaded.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 111 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE ANNOUNCEMENTS
Overview
Announcements post timely information critical to course success. The Instructor can add, modify,
and remove announcements from the Announcements page. This is an ideal place to post timesensitive material such as:
•
when assignments are due
•
changes in the syllabus
•
corrections/clarifications of materials
•
exam schedules
Find this page
Click Announcements in Course areas on the Control Panel to open the Announcements page.
Functions
The functions available on this page are described in the table below.
TO . . .
CLICK
add an announcement
Add Announcement. The Add Announcement page will
appear.
view
announcements
different time period
for
a
...
a tab to view events for the current day, last 30 days,
the last seven days, or all announcements. View Last
7 days is the default.
modify an announcement
Modify. The Modify Announcement page will appear.
remove an announcement
Remove. A confirmation box will appear. Removing an
Announcement is irreversible.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 112 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
STAFF INFORMATION
Overview
The Staff Information page allows Instructors to post information about themselves, Teaching
Assistants, guest speakers, and other Course leaders. The page gives users a resource to look up
names, email addresses, office hours, and photographs.
Find this page
To open the Staff Information page, click Staff Information in Course areas on the Control Panel.
Functions
The functions available on this page are described in the table below.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
add a staff profile
Add Profile. The Add Profile page will appear.
add a new folder
Add Folder. The Add Folder page will appear.
modify a profile
Modify. The Modify Profile page will appear.
modify a folder
Modify. The Modify Folder page will appear.
remove an item or folder
Remove. A warning will appear. Removing a staff profile or folder
is irreversible.
order profiles
the drop-down arrow and select a number. The items will appear
on the Staff Information page in the order selected.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 113 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD OR MODIFY PROFILE
Overview
Staff profiles may be added or modified through the Add Profile or Modify Profile page. The fields
on the Add Profile page and Modify Profile page are the same. The Add Profile page opens with
empty fields while the Modify Profile page opens with a profile already populated.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add Profile page.
1.
Click Staff Information in Course areas of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Profile. To modify a profile, click Modify.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Add Profile or Modify Profile page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Profile Information
Title
Enter the staff member’s title. This title will appear before the
first name.
First Name
Enter a first name.
Last Name
Enter a last name.
Email
Enter an e-mail address.
Work Phone
Enter a work phone.
Office Location
Enter an office location.
Office Hours
Enter office hours.
Notes
Enter any additional information about the staff member.
Options
Do you want to make
the Profile visible
Select Yes or No to make the profile available to Students. If
No is selected, none of the information entered on this page
will appear to Students.
Current Image
The image that currently appears with the Staff Profile.
Profile image
Enter the path to a graphic file with a picture of the staff
member or click Browse to search for a file. This image will be
included next to the staff profile on the Staff Information page.
Personal link
Enter the URL for the staff member’s home page. When
adding a URL, do so as http://www.blackboard.com, not
www.blackboard.com or blackboard.com. This link appears
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 114 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
with the staff profile on the Staff Information page.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 115 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CALENDAR
Overview
Instructors can use the Calendar to indicate important course related events. The dates and events
that appear on the Calendar are for all users in the course.
Some typical items Instructors may include in the calendar are:
•
section meetings
•
assignment due dates
•
exams
•
guest speakers
Find this page
Click Course Calendar in Course Tools to open the Calendar page.
Functions
To use the functions available on the Calendar page, follow the table below.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
create an event and add
it to the Calendar
Add Event. The Add Calendar Event page will appear.
view events for a
specific date and time
Quick Jump. The Quick Jump page will appear. Select a date
and time and the calendar will immediately display events for
that time.
view events by day,
week, or month
the corresponding tab to view events for the current day,
current week, current month, or current year.
view previous or future
events
the right arrow to view future events or left arrow to view
previous events.
view event details
the calendar event to view details, such as date, time, and
event category.
modify an event
Modify corresponding to an event to make changes.
Remove an event
Remove corresponding to an event to remove it from the
calendar. This action is irreversible.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 116 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD OR MODIFY CALENDAR EVENT
Overview
Events may be added or modified by accessing the Add Calendar Event page or Modify Calendar
Event page. The fields on the Add Calendar Event page and Modify Calendar Event page are the
same. The Add Calendar Event page opens with empty fields where as the Modify Calendar Event
page opens with an event already populated.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add Calendar Event page.
1.
Click Course Calendar in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Event from the Calendar page. To modify an event, click Modify next to an
event and the Modify Event page will appear.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Add Event page and Modify Event page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Event Information
Event Title
Enter the title of the event. This title will appear on the
Calendar page at the date and time indicated on the Event
Time fields.
Event
Description
(4,000
characters
maximum)
Enter a description of the event. The maximum number of
characters is 4000.
Event Time
Event Date
Select the date of the event from the drop-down list or click the
icon to select a date from the calendar interface.
Event Start Time
Select the time the event will begin from the drop-down list.
Event End Time
Select the time the event will end from the drop-down list.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 117 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CALENDAR QUICK JUMP
Overview
The Calendar Quick Jump page allows users to quickly access a month, week, or day in the
Calendar. Calendar Quick Jump is useful when looking for events planned for months in advance
of the current date.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Quick Jump page.
1.
Click Course Calendar in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Quick Jump from the Calendar page.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Calendar Quick Jump page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Calendar Quick Jump
Please select the date
you wish to access.
Use the drop-down arrow to select a calendar date or click
the icon to select a date from the Calendar interface. The
Calendar page will appear with the selected date.
Please choose the type
of view you wish to
access the specified
date.
Select an option to indicate the type of Calendar view:
• Month. Display the month in which the date falls.
• Week. Display the week in which the date falls.
• Day. Display that date only.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 118 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
TASKS
Overview
The Tasks page organizes projects or activities (referred to as tasks) by defining task priority and
tracking task status. A user can create tasks and post them to the Tasks page. Each user can post
personal tasks to their page, Instructors can post tasks to users participating in their courses, and
System Administrators can post tasks to all users’ Tasks pages. Task information is arranged in
columns that display the priority, task name, status, and due date.
Find this page
Click Tasks in Course Tool on the Control Panel to open the Tasks page.
Functions
To use the functions available on the Tasks page, follow the table below.
TO . . .
CLICK
view a task and the details of the
task
the task link.
create and post a task
Add Task to access the Create Task page. The Add
Task page will appear.
modify a task
Modify to access the Modify Task page for a
particular task. The Modify Task page will appear.
remove a task
Remove to remove a task. This action is irreversible.
sort
the link at the top of the Priority, Subject, or Due
Date column.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 119 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD OR MODIFY TASK
Overview
Tasks may be added or modified by accessing the Add Task page or Modify Task page. The fields
on the Add Task page and Modify Task page are the same. The Add Task page opens with empty
fields where as the Modify Task page opens with a task already populated.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add Task page or the Modify Task page.
1.
Click Tasks in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Task from the Tasks page. To modify a task, click Modify and the Modify Task
page will appear.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Add Task or Modify Task page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Task Information
Task Title
Enter the title of the task.
Description
Enter a description of the task.
Due Date
Select the date the task is due from the drop-down list or click the
icon to select a date from the calendar interface.
Task Options
Priority
Select a priority. The options are:
• Low (task appears with a blue arrow pointed down)
• Normal
• High (task appears with a red arrow pointed up)
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 120 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
SEND EMAIL
Overview
Instructors can send email to individuals who participate in the course from the Send Email page.
Emails can be sent to individual users or to groups of users within the course, such as all Teaching
Assistants.
Instructors cannot send email to others via the Internet with the Send Email function.
Find this page
Click Send Email in Course Tools on the Control Panel to open the Send E-mail page.
Functions
The following functions are available from the Send email page:
F UNCTION
D ESCRIPTION
All Users
Sends email to all users in a specified course.
All Groups
Sends email to all of the groups in a specified course.
All Teaching
Assistants
Sends email to all of the Teaching Assistants in the course.
All Instructors
Sends email to all of the Instructors in the course.
All Observers
Sends email to all of the Observers for a specified course
Single / Select
Users
Sends email to a single user or select users in the course.
Single / Select
Groups
Send email to a single group or select groups in the course.
Single / Select
Observers
Send email to a single Observer or select Observers in the course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 121 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
SEND EMAIL TO ALL USERS
Overview
Send Email enables users to send email to fellow classmates, Instructors, Teaching Assistants or
Groups within a course.
NOTE: Recipients of each email will not see the email addresses of other
recipients.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Send Email-Compose Message page.
1.
Click Send Email in Course Tools on the Control Panel.
2.
Click one of the options to select the recipients. The Compose Message page will appear.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Send Email page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Enter Message Details
To
Recipients display in this field.
From
The sender's email address will automatically be displayed in
this field.
Subject
Enter the subject of the email.
Message
Enter the body of the email.
Set Message Options
Copy of message to
self
Select the check box to send a copy of the message to the
sender.
Add Attachments
Add
Click here to add attachments. Select Browse and navigate to
the file that should be attached to the email.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 122 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
DIGITAL DROP BOX
Overview
The Digital Drop Box enables Students to exchange files with the Instructor.
NOTE: A file added to the Drop Box will not appear to the Instructor until it has
been sent. Once a file has been sent to the Instructor, it cannot be removed from
the Drop Box.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Digital Drop Box page.
1.
Open a Course.
2.
Click Control Panel.
3.
Select Digital Drop Box.
Functions
The following functions are available from the Digital Drop box page.
F UNCTION
D ESCRIPTION
Add File
Upload files to the Drop Box.
Send File
Send a file to the Instructor.
Remove
Remove a file from the Drop Box.
Time stamps
The following date and time information is included in files:
•
Files sent to the Instructor will show the date and time submitted.
•
Files that are added to the Drop Box but not sent will show the date and time posted.
•
Files sent from the Instructor will show the date and time received.
NOTE: The date and time displayed in each instance is not the date and
time on the user’s machine, rather, it is the date and time on the
Blackboard Academic Suite server.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 123 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD FILE TO THE DIGITAL DROP BOX
Overview
Files are added to the Digital Drop Box from the Add File page. A file is not automatically sent if it is
placed in the Drop Box through the Add File option. Files must be sent through the Send File
option.
Files that are added to the Drop Box but not sent will show the date and time posted. Once the file
is sent it will show the date and time sent.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add File page.
1.
Open a Course.
2.
Click Control Panel.
3.
Select Digital Drop Box.
4.
Click Add File.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Add File page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
File Information
Title
Enter the title of the file.
File
Click Browse to locate a file or enter the exact path.
Comments
Enter any comments related to the file. These comments will
appear beneath the title on the Drop Box page.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 124 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
SEND FILE FROM THE DIGITAL DROP BOX
Overview
Users can select a file already in the Digital Drop Box to send. Users may also select a file not in
the Digital Drop Box on the Send File page. A file sent that is not already in the user’s Drop Box is
added to the user’s Drop Box when it is sent.
Files that are added to the Drop Box but not sent will show the date and time posted. Once the file
is sent to it will show the date and time sent.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Send File page.
1.
Open a Course.
2.
Click Control Panel.
3.
Select Digital Drop Box.
4.
Click Send File.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
File Information
Select File
Click the drop-down arrow and select a file to send.
Title
Enter the title of the file.
File
Click Browse to upload a file and send it to the Instructor.
Comments
Enter any comments about the file. These comments will
appear beneath the title.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 125 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
GLOSSARY MANAGER
-Overview
Each course has its own Glossary of terms. Each entry consists of the term and an accompanying
definition. The Glossary must be enabled by the Instructor before Students can view it. To turn on
the Glossary, simply enable it as a Course Tool and then add it to the Course Menu.
The Glossary Manager controls all of the entries in the Course Glossary.
Find this page
Click Glossary Manager from the Control Panel.
Fields
The table below details the functions on the Glossary Manager page.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
Add a term
Add Term in the action bar. A page will appear with entry fields to
create a term.
Delete a term
Remove. Each term in the Glossary has its own remove link.
Change a term
Modify. Each term in the Glossary has its own modify link.
Upload a file of
terms
Upload Glossary in the action bar.
Download the
Glossary
Download Glossary in the action bar.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 126 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD GLOSSARY TERM
Overview
Glossary terms may be added one-by-one using the Add Glossary Term page. On this page, an
Instructor may add a single term and its associated definition. To load a number of terms at once
into the Glossary, use the Upload Glossary feature.
Find this page
Follow these steps to find the Add Glossary Term page:
1.
Click Glossary Manager from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Term from the action bar on the Glossary Manager page.
Fields
The table below details the entry fields on the Add Glossary Term page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Term
Enter a term to add to the Glossary.
Definition
Enter a definition for the term. Definitions may include simple
HTML to modify text, but more sophisticated HTML formatting
should be avoided. Also, carriage returns are not recognized when
entered in a definition, but HTML code to denote breaks in text will
work.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 127 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
DOWNLOAD GLOSSARY
Overview
Downloading a Glossary creates a comma delimited data file (.CSV) of the Glossary. Each entry is
separated by a hard return and within each entry the term and the definition are separated by a
comma.
Downloading a Glossary is useful for adding terms to another course. The Glossary can be
modified offline and then uploaded to another course.
Find this page
Follow these steps to find the Download Glossary page:
1.
Click Glossary Manager from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Download Glossary from the action bar on the Glossary Manager page.
Download a Glossary
To download a Glossary, simply click Download. The Glossary may be edited in a spreadsheet
program such as Excel or in a text editor like Notepad. Please see the next topic, Upload a
Glossary,for details on the formatting of a Glossary file.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 128 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
UPLOAD GLOSSARY
Overview
Uploading a Glossary is a quick method of adding many terms to the Glossary. Uploading a
Glossary can either replace the existing Glossary or supplement it by adding the terms in the file to
the existing Glossary.
Find this page
Follow these steps to find the Upload Glossary page:
1.
Click Glossary Manager from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Download Glossary from the action bar on the Glossary Manager page.
Fields
The table below details the entry fields on the Upload Glossary page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Specify Upload File
CSV File
Enter the full path to the Glossary file. The Glossary file must be a
comma delimited data file (.CSV). Alternatively, click Browse to
search your computer's files for a Glossary file.
Upload File Options
Add the items in
the list to the
existing Glossary
Select this option to supplement the existing Glossary with a list of
new terms. If a term appears in both the existing Glossary and the
file, the definition in the file will replace the definition in the existing
Glossary. If the same term appears two or more times in the file,
the last definition for the term will appear in the Glossary.
Delete all existing
Glossary
terms
and replace with
the terms in this
list
Select this option to remove the existing Glossary and replace it
with the terms in the upload file.
Glossary file format
Within the CSV file, each entry is separated by a hard return and the term and the definition are
separated by a comma. For example:
"Apple","A red fruit."
"Onion", "A vegetable."
Although it is not always necessary to enclose the term and the definition in quotes, Blackboard
strongly recommends this practice to avoid processing errors.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 129 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Example:
"Apple","A delicious fruit, usually <b>red</b> in color. Apples are
grown all over the world and are an important religious and mythical
symbol to several cultures. The Pacific Northwest region of the United
States, particularly Washington state, is famous for its
apples.<br><br> However, most refined apple lovers agree that the best
apples come from the Hudson River valley area of New York. Perhaps this
is why New York City is nicknamed, ""The Big Apple."""
"Onion","Onions are a tasty vegetable with green stalks and a white,
yellow, or red bulb. For the best-tasting Onions, visit the \"Onion
Capital of the World\" Pine Island, New York."
Quotation marks that appear in a definition or a term must be escaped. This means that the
quotation mark must be identified as part of the definition or the mark will be read as the end of the
definition. Quotation marks may be escaped using a backslash (\") or another set of quotation
marks ("").
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 130 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
MESSAGES
Overview
The Messages feature gives each course a private and secure system for communication that
functions similar to email. Keep in mind that Messages cannot be sent or received outside of the
users in the course.
Messages are usually accessed through the Communications area of a course. Although, as with
most features, the Instructor can restrict access or change the layout of the Course Menu so that
Messages are accessible directly.
Find this page
Messages may be accessed through the Communications area of the Course Menu or Instructors
may access Messages from the Control Panel.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 131 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 6—COMMUNICATION
Overview
Collaboration Tools and Discussion Boards allow users and Instructors to engage in synchronous
and asynchronous communication.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Discussion Boards
Details how users participate in an online Discussion Board.
Collaboration
Explains the Virtual Classroom and Lightweight Chat, which enable
users to participate in an on-line collaboration with Instructor and
Students.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 132 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
DISCUSSION BOARD
Overview
The Discussion Board is a communication medium for posting and responding to messages.
Conversations are grouped as threads that contain a main posting and all related replies. An
advantage of the Discussion Board is that threads are logged and organized.
Find this page
To open the Discussion Board page, click Discussion Board in Course Tools on the Control
Panel.
Functions
The functions available on this page are described in the table below:
TO . . .
CLICK
...
add
a
new
discussion forum
Add Forum. The Add Forum page will appear.
access a forum
listed
on
the
Discussion Board
a forum topic link. That forum will appear.
modify a forum
Modify. The Modify Forum page will appear.
remove a forum
Remove. A confirmation box will appear. Removing a forum is
irreversible.
change the order of
forums
the drop-down arrow and select a number. The forums will appear
on the Discussion Board in the order selected.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 133 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD OR MODIFY FORUM
Overview
Forums are used to organize threads. While Instructors must create new forums, they can enable
other users to manage a forum once it is created. The fields on the Add Forum page and the
Modify Forum page are the same. The Add Forum page opens with empty fields while the Modify
Forum page opens with a forum already populated.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add Forum page or Modify Forum page.
1.
Click Discussion Board in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Forum. To modify a forum, click Modify and the Modify Forum page will
appear.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Forum Information
Title
Enter a title. This title will appear as the name of the Discussion
Board forum to all users.
Description
Enter a description of the forum.
Forum Settings
Check the appropriate boxes to
• Allow anonymous posts.
• Allow author to edit message after posting.
• Allow author to remove his or her posts.
• Allow file attachments.
• Allow new threads.
Forum User Settings
Highlight a user and click the appropriate button to assign Forum User Settings.
Normal
Normal settings allow users to read posts and create posts in a
forum.
Admin
Assigns forum administrator privileges to a selected user.
• Permanent Forum Administrator – the person who
created the forum. No one can take away these privileges.
• Forum Administrator privileges – assigned by the
Permanent Forum Administrator. Enables another user to
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 134 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
manage the forum.
Block
Blocks a user from posting to the Discussion Board forum. Only the
Forum Administrator or the Permanent Forum Administrator can
block a user.
Unblock
Unblocks a blocked user.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 135 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
FORUMS
Overview
Forums are used to organize discussions on related topics. Students and Instructors click
discussion links to access a forum from the main Discussion Board page. When a discussion is
started within a forum it is called a thread.
Find this page
Double-click on a forum link to access a discussion forum.The forum opens and the discussion
threads within the forum appear.
Functions
The table below details the functions available within a forum.
TO . . .
CLICK
start a new discussion
thread
Add New Thread. The Add Thread page will appear.
view all messages
the View all Messages up arrow. All messages will be shown.
view unread messages
the View Unread Messages down arrow. All unread messages
will be shown.
see all the threads and
responses
EXPAND ALL (+). All threads and responses will appear.
see only the threads
COLLAPSE ALL (-). The topic threads will appear.
read a message
a link to a message. The message will appear along with any
available options for modifying the message, removing the
message, or responding to the message.
Send an email to the
author of a thread
the name of the person. The email program associated with the
browser is activated and an email will appear with their name in
the To: field.
view tool bar
Options tab. The options tool bar will appear. These options
are described in the next table.
archive a Discussion
Board thread
Click Here for Archives.
resort
the
messages
the drop-down arrow and select one of the following options to
Sort By:
list
of
...
• Author: to have the messages sort by author.
• Date: to have the messages sort by the earliest date.
This is the default.
• Subject: to have the messages sort by the subject.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 136 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
Options tab
The table below describes the functions available on the Options tab.
TO . . .
THEN
...
select all threads and posts in the forum
click Select All.
unselect the posts selected
click Unselect All.
unselect the threads and posts that have
been selected and select the threads and
posts that have not been selected
click Invert.
mark posts as read
select the posts and click Read.
mark posts as unread
select the posts and click Unread.
view multiple threads or posts
select the posts and click Collect.
lock a thread or post
select the post and click Lock. Participants
can view but not reply to a post that is
locked.
If a thread is locked, all of the posts within
the thread are locked. The thread must be
unlocked, for the posts within to be
unlocked.
unlock a thread or post
select the posts and click Unlock.
remove a thread or post
select the posts and click Remove.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 137 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
POST AND REPLY
Overview
A new post starts a thread. All responses to the post appear in the same thread.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add New Thread page.
1.
Click Discussion Board from the Communication area.
2.
Click on a forum link to open it.
3.
Click Add New Thread.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Add New Thread page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Message Information
Current Forum
The name of the Discussion Board Forum appears in this field.
Date
The date appears in this field.
Author
The name of the author appears here.
Subject
Add a subject for the post.
Message
Enter a message.
Options
Post
message
Anonymous
Select the check box to post an anonymous message. This
option may or may not be available depending on the
Discussion Forum.
Attachment
Enter the file path or click Browse to locate a file.
Preview
Preview the message as it will appear on the Discussion
Board.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 138 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
FORUM ARCHIVES
Overview
Discussion Board threads can be archived by the Instructor and made available to Students.
Archived threads are removed from the forum and stored separately.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open a Forum Archive page.
1.
Click Discussion Board in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Double-click on a forum. The forum opens and the Discussion threads appear.
3.
Select Click Here for Archives.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page.
TO…
CLICK …
view the archived
threads in a forum
the name of the forum. A page will appear that displays all of the
archived threads in the forum.
archive a thread
Add Archive. The Add Archive page will appear.
add threads to the
archive or modify
archive
Modify. The Modify Archive page will appear.
remove the archive
Remove. All of the archived threads will be removed from the
system. This action is irreversible.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 139 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD ARCHIVE
Overview
New archives are created on the Add Archive page. Once a new archive is created, threads can be
added through the Modify Archive page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add Archive page.
1.
Click Discussion Board in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Double-click on a forum link.
3.
Select Click Here for Archives.
4.
Click Add Archive.
Fields
The table below details the available fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Add Archive
Archive Title
Enter a title for the archive.
Description
Enter a description for the archive.
Available
Select this option to make this archive available for Students to
view.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 140 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MODIFY ARCHIVE
Overview
After an archive is created threads can be added to it from the Modify Archive page. This page also
enables the Instructor to modify the title, description, and availability of the archive.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Modify Archive page.
1.
Click Discussion Board in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
2.
Double-click on a forum.
3.
Select Click Here for Archives.
4.
Click Modify next to an archive.
Fields
The table below details the available fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Modify Archive
Archive Title
Enter a title for the archive.
Description
Enter a description for the archive.
Available
Select this option to make this archive available for Students to
view.
Release archived
thread into Forum
Select the check boxes next to threads that will be removed from
the archive and returned to the forum.
Select threads to
move to Archive
Select the check boxes next to threads that will be placed in the
archive.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 141 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COLLABORATION TOOLS
Overview
The Collaboration Tools allow users to participate in real-time lessons and discussions. Examples
of these sessions include real-time, online classroom discussions, TA sessions, and live question
and answer forums. Archives of previous sessions are also available for review. Guest speakers
can also lead sessions using the Collaboration Tools. Users can search for and join Collaboration
Sessions and view session archives.
Collaboration Tools
The following Collaboration Tools are available.
T OOL
D ESCRIPTION
Virtual Classroom
Users engage in a real-time discussion with other users, access
the Web, and engage in question and answer sessions. Users may
also access the Whiteboard to display text and images.
Chat
Chat is part of the Virtual Classroom. It can also be accessed
separately. Chat allows users to open just the chat function.
Java Plug-in
The Java 2 Run Time Environment 1.3.1_04 or higher is required to use the Collaboration Tools.
The plug-in may be downloaded from the page that appears when a user joins a Collaboration
Session, or may be found at http://java.sun.com/products/plugin/index.html.
Take care to uninstall any existing Java plug-ins before installing a new version.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Collaboration Sessions page.
1.
Click Communication on the Course Menu in a Course.
2.
Select Collaboration.
Functions
The following table describes the functions available from this page.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
filter the sessions
listed on the page
the arrow next to the drop-down list and select the type of session
to display. Click Filter. The filters include:
• Show All – The default filter that displays all of the
Collaboration Sessions.
• Open Rooms – Displays all of the sessions that are in use.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 142 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
TO . . .
CLICK
...
• Rooms with Archives – Displays completed sessions that
have an archive.
• Rooms Available in the Future – Displays sessions that
are scheduled to take place in the future.
search
session
for
a
the Session Name, Start Date, or End Date option and then enter
a value in the field. Click Search.
enter a session
Join next to the session.
access the archives
for a session
Archives next to the session.
User Roles
There are two roles available for users in Collaboration Sessions: Passive and Active. The Session
Admin controls user access and functionality during a Collaboration session by assigning Passive
or Active roles. For example, Session Admins determine which users can chat, send private
messages, or ask questions during a session by assigning specific Access Rights to the different
roles. The Student icon will appear in the Role column next to those Students who are Active.
Student roles can change throughout the Collaboration Session. Users who are Passive, but would
like Active rights, can signal the Session Admin by clicking the hand icon. The Session Admin then
makes the user Active.
Macintosh and the Collaboration Tool
Macintosh users running OS X and Netscape should run Netscape 7. When opening the
Collaboration Tool, Netscape may put the tool in the background. If this happens, check under the
Window menu for the Collaboration Tool. Netscape 6.2 does not work well with the Collaboration
Tool and should be replaced with Netscape 7. For those users that wish to use Safari, be aware
that Pop-Up Window Blocking must disabled.
Macintosh users running OS 8 or OS 9 must use the Accessible version of the Collaboration Tool.
See below for more information on running the Accessible Collaboration Tool.
Accessible Collaboration Tool
An accessible version of the Collaboration Tool is available. Users running Macintosh Operating
System 8 or 9 should also use this version.
A link to this version appears when Join is selected on the Collaboration Sessions page. This link
will open the Accessible version of the Collaboration Tool. Links to items that appear in the Virtual
Classroom, such as items in the Course Map and Group Browser, will appear in this version.
Documents created on the Whiteboard may be viewed if the Session Admin takes a snapshot. A
link will be created to the snapshot for users to view.
The sound of a door opening or closing will be audible to all participants when a user enters or
leaves a session through the accessible version.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 143 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COLLABORATION SESSIONS
Overview
The Collaboration Session page is used to manage the Collaboration Tools available in the
Blackboard Learning System. From this page the Instructor can access all of the Collaboration
Sessions for the course, including those that have already taken place and are archived and those
that are scheduled for the future. Instructors can also schedule new Collaboration Sessions and
make changes to those already scheduled from this page.
Find this page
Click Collaboration in the Course Tools area of the Control Panel.
Default Collaboration Sessions
Each course and organization begins with two default Collaboration Sessions. The Lecture Hall is
the default Virtual Classroom, and Office Hours is the default Lightweight Chat. These default
sessions can be removed. Removing a session is irreversible.
Functions
The following functions are available from the Collaboration Sessions page:
TO . . .
CLICK
...
new
Create Collaboration Session. The Create Collaboration Session
page will open.
filter the sessions
listed on the page
the arrow next to the drop-down list and select the type of session
to display. Click Filter. The filters include:
create
a
Collaboration
Session
• Show All – The default filter that displays all of the
Collaboration Sessions.
• Open Rooms – Displays all of the sessions that are
currently being used.
• Rooms with Archives – Displays completed sessions that
have an archive.
• Rooms Available in the Future – Displays sessions that
are scheduled to take place in the future.
search
session
for
a
the Session Name, Start Date or End Date option and then enter
a value in the field. Click Search.
enter a session
Join next to the session. The Virtual Classroom or Chat for that
session will open.
access the archives
for a session
Archives next to the session. The Session Archives page will
appear.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 144 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
TO . . .
CLICK
...
change the name,
availability, or tools
used during the
session
Manage next to the session. The Modify Collaboration Session
page will appear.
delete a session
Remove next to the session. This action is irreversible.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 145 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CREATE/MODIFY COLLABORATION SESSION
Overview
Instructors create new Collaboration Sessions using the Virtual Classroom or the Chat from the
Create Collaboration Session page. Instructors can schedule sessions for specific dates and times.
The Create Collaboration Session page and Modify Collaboration Session page function in a
similar manner. The Create Collaboration Session page opens with empty fields while the Modify
Collaboration Session page opens with a session already populated.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Create Collaboration Session page or the Modify Collaboration
Session page.
1.
Click Collaboration in Course Tools of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Create Collaboration Session on the Collaboration Sessions page or click Manage
next to a Collaboration Session.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Create Collaboration Session page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Name Your Session
Enter the name of the new session.
Session Name
Schedule Availability
Select Dates
Availability
of
Available
A Start and End date and time for the Collaboration Session can be
set but is not required. If these are not selected then the session is
always open and available for users.
Select Yes to make the session available.
Collaboration Tools
Choose
a
collaboration tool
for this session
Select Virtual Classroom or Chat.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 146 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
VIRTUAL CLASSROOM
Overview
Users can ask questions, draw on the whiteboard, and participate in breakout sessions from the
Virtual Classroom. The Session Admin establishes which tools in the Virtual Classroom users can
access.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Virtual Classroom.
1.
Click Communication on the Course Menu.
2.
Select Collaboration Tools.
3.
Click Join next to a Virtual Classroom session.
Virtual Classroom areas
The table below details the areas of the Virtual Classroom.
P ART
F UNCTION
Menu Bar
Allows the Session Admin to control the Virtual Classroom. This
includes managing participation, monitoring breakout sessions, and
ending the session.
Classroom
box
Chat
Tool
Includes all of the tools used during the Virtual Classroom session.
This includes searching for Web sites, asking and answering
questions, utilizing the Whiteboard, and accessing the Course Map.
Allows users to compose messages, raise their hands to ask
questions, and activate private messages.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 147 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
MENU BAR
Overview
All users have access to the options on the Menu Bar. The functions available in the Menu Bar
include:
•
View - Choose an option for viewing Personal Messages in the Virtual Classroom.
•
Clear - Clear the session display.
•
Breakouts - Create a breakout room for a group of users.
View
Select Show in-line to view private messages within the chat area. Select Show in separate
frame to view private messages in a separate window.
Clear
Clear erases the users chat display.
Breakouts
Select the checkboxes for the users who will participate in the Breakout session. Users may only
join a Breakout session if they are selected by the creator of the Breakout session.
Users who enter a Breakout session are still active in the main Virtual Classroom Session. If a
Breakout session is closed users are still active in the main session. Breakout sessions default to
the same settings as the main session.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 148 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CLASSROOM TOOL BOX
Overview
If granted access to these tools by the Session Admin, users can use the Whiteboard, access Web
sites, and view the course map.
The Classroom Tool box appears on the left side of the Virtual Classroom. To begin using items in
the Tool box click the name of the tool.
Tools
The following tools are available in the Classroom Tool box.
T OOL
D ESCRIPTION
Whiteboard
Enables users to present different types of information as they
would on a blackboard in a classroom.
Group Browser
Enables users to collaboratively browse the Web.
Course Map
Enables users to browse the Course Contents while they are in a
Virtual Classroom.
Ask Question
Enables users to ask questions during the session.
Question Inbox
Enables users to answer questions submitted by other users during
a session.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 149 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
WHITEBOARD
Overview
The Whiteboard enables users in a Virtual Classroom to present different types of information as
they would on a blackboard in a classroom. Using the tools in the Whiteboard Tools palette, users
can draw images, type text, and present equations. The Session Admin determines whether or not
this function is made available to users.
Functions
The table below details the tools available for use on the Whiteboard.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
select an item
the Arrow tool. Then click on an item for selection. The
following may be performed on selected items:
• Enlarge: Click one of the small black boxes that
surround the item and drag it to the desired size.
• Move: Click the item and move it to the desired
location.
• Cut: Click the Whiteboard item. Then click the Cut icon.
• Copy: Click the Whiteboard item. Then click the Copy
icon.
• Paste: Click the Whiteboard item. Then click the Paste
icon.
• Delete: Click the Whiteboard item. Click on the selected
object. Then click the Delete icon.
• Group items: Click the Whiteboard items. Then click the
Group icon.
• Ungroup: Click a Whiteboard item in a group. Then click
the Ungroup icon.
• Bring front: Click the Whiteboard item. Click on selected
object. Then click the Bring to front icon.
• Bring back: Click the Whiteboard item. Click on
selected object. Then click the Send to back icon.
• Select all figures on the Whiteboard: Click the Selects
all Figures icon.
draw free hand
the Pen tool. Choose the color of the pen in the Fill Color
drop-down list.
enter text using the
keyboard
the text tool (T) then the Whiteboard area. A Whiteboard Text
Input box appears. Type the text in the box and click Insert.
Use the options in the Tools palette to select color, font, and
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 150 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
TO . . .
CLICK
...
size.
draw a straight line
the Slanted Line tool.
highlight
something
with an arrow
the Pointer.
draw a square
the Square tool. Choose the color of the square from the Fill
Color drop-down list.
draw a circle
the Oval tool. Choose the color of the circle from the Fill Color
drop-down list.
input an equation
The Math and Science Equation Editor icon (∑). The Equation
Editor will appear. Input the equation and click Insert
Equation.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 151 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
GROUP BROWSER
Overview
The Group Browser enables users to collaboratively browse the Web. This tool opens a URL that is
viewable by all users. URLs used in the session will be recorded in the archive if one is created.
The Session Admin will determine whether or not this function is made available to users.
Functions
The table below details the available functions in the Group Browser.
TO . . .
CLICK
open a Web site
type the URL in the Enter Address field.
choose
display
site
Display To Class to display the window in the Whiteboard or click
Preview in New Window to open the Web site in a new browser
window. The preview window will only be displayed to the user that
opened it.
where to
the Web
...
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 152 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CONTENT MAP
Overview
The Content Map enables users to browse the course while in a Virtual Classroom. By default, the
Session Admin has access to operate the Content Map. Users must have Active privileges to use
the Content Map in a Virtual Classroom.
Functions
The table below details the available functions in the Content Map.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
display an element
on the map to all
users
the course area in the Content Map and select Display To Class in
the drop-down list.
display an element
on the map in a
separate window
the course area in the Content Map and select Preview in New
Window in the drop-down list. The new window is only visible to
the User who opens it.
refresh the Content
Map
during
a
Collaboration
Session
Refresh Tree in the drop-down list. This will update the Content
Map to match the Course Menu.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 153 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ASK QUESTION
Overview
Users are able to ask questions during the session. As users submit questions during the session
the Session Admin can view and respond to them.
NOTE: Only users who have an Active role can ask questions.
Ask a Question
To ask a question, select Compose in the Ask Question area. Enter the question in the text box
and click Send.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 154 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
QUESTION INBOX
Overview
Questions from users are sent to the Question Inbox during the Virtual Classroom session. The
Question Inbox is used to manage and respond to questions during a Collaboration Session.
Function
The table below details the functions available in the Question Inbox Tool.
TO . . .
respond
question
CLICK
to
a
...
the Username in the From list and click the Respond to Question
icon. The Respond to Question pop-up window will appear.
delete a question
the Username in the From list and click the Delete icon.
view only questions
that have not been
answered
the checkbox next to Show unanswered only.
Respond to Question fields
The table below details the fields on the Respond to Question pop-up window.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Question
Question that was submitted.
Response
Enter the response to the question.
Private
Select this check box to make the response to the question private.
If marked private, the response will only be sent to the person who
submitted the message.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 155 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAT
Overview
The Chat allows the users to interact with each other via a text-based chat. Chat is part of the
Virtual Classroom. It can also be accessed separately.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open a Chat:
1.
Click Communication on the Course Menu.
2.
Select Collaboration Tools.
3.
Click Join to next to a Chat session.
Functions
The table below details the functions available in the Chat.
TO . . .
THEN
enter a message
for the class to read
type the message in the Compose field. Click Send. The message
will appear in the chat area. There 1000 character limit for chat
messages.
become an Active
user
click the hand symbol. A hand appears next to the Username. The
Session Admin clicks on the hand to make the user Active.
view
information
Select a Username in the Participant list and then click User Info.
user
send
a
private
message to a user
...
Select a Username in the Participant list and then click Private
Message.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 156 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
PRIVATE MESSAGES
Overview
Users can send private messages to each other if the Session Admin enables this tool in the
Session Controls. Private messages are not recorded or archived.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 157 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
USER INFORMATION
Overview
The User Information pop-up window displays personal information about a user such as name,
email address, and any other information the user has chosen to add to their profile.
Click User Info in the Chat area and the User Information pop-up window will appear.
Send a Private Message
Click Private Message to send a message to the user. The Compose Private Message pop-up
window will appear.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 158 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
RECORD MENU
Overview
Virtual Classroom and Chat sessions can be recorded and archived. Archive recording can be
started and stopped, as well as paused and un-paused by the Instructor during the session. A
session can have more then one archive. If the Instructor selects End to stop a session then the
recorder will automatically stop recording the session.
Record menu
The table below details the buttons that appear on the Record menu.
B UTTON
D ESCRIPTION
Start
Click Start to begin recording a session. The user will be prompted
to name the archive.
Pause
Click Pause to pause a recording once it has started. Click this
button again to u-pause the recording and begin recording again.
Pause and un-pause will be marked and timestamped in the
archive.
Stop
Click Stop to end recording the session. When Stop is selected the
archive is completed and a stop marker and time/date stamp will be
included at the end of the archive.
Bookmark
Click Bookmark to insert a bookmark anywhere in the archive of
the session.
Recording the Whiteboard
The Snapshoot button in the Whiteboard Tool bar is used to record the Whiteboard in the archive.
The Instructor clicks the Snapshot button to record an image of the Whiteboard. The image of the
Whiteboard in the archive corresponds with when it was recorded. The Snapshot button cannot be
activated unless the session is being recorded.
Session Archives
The Instructor must make an archive available before Students can view it. For more information
see Archive Properties.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 159 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
SESSION ARCHIVES
Introduction
Session Archives allow users to review Collaboration Sessions. Sessions are archived by date.
Sessions will not appear until the leader of the session has stopped recording.
NOTE: If an Instructor does not stop the archive and exit the Collaboration
Session, the archive will not end and no information will be recorded in the
Archive Duration column. Only when the leader stops recording or ends
the session will the archive stop and the duration display.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to access the Session Archives page.
1.
Open Collaboration in Course Tools on the Control Panel
2.
Click Archives for a session.
Functions
The table below describes the functions available on this page.
TO . . .
search
for
Archive
in
Collaboration
Session
CLICK
an
the
...
the Archive Name or Creation Date option in the Search by field.
Enter the name of the archive or the date it was created in the field
and click Search.
open an archive
the archive under the Archive name column.
change the name
or availability of an
archive
Manage. The Archive Properties page will appear.
remove an archive
Remove. This action is irreversible.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 160 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ARCHIVE PROPERTIES
Introduction
The Archive Properties page allows the Instructor to change the name and availability of an archive
session.
NOTE: Archives are available to Students by default
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Archive Properties page.
1.
Click Collaboration in the Course Tools section of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Archives for a session.
3.
Click Manage for an archive.
Fields
The table below describes the fields available on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Edit Archive Name
Archive Name
Enter or modify the name of the archive.
Availability to Students
Available
Select Yes and Students will be able to view this archive. Select
No and this archive will be unavailable to Students.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 161 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 7—COURSE OPTIONS
Overview
Use the Course Options area to manage the availability and accessibility of a course as well as
manage the appearance of course features. Course Options also includes tools to archive or
recycle the course, and import content.
In this chapter
This chapter contains information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Manage Course
Menu
Select which course areas will appear in the Course Menu.
Manage Course
Design
Create a design for the Course Menu and Course Banner.
Manage Tools
Enable Blackboard Learning System, Building Block, and Content
tools.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 162 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MANAGE COURSE MENU
Overview
Add and modify course areas from the Manage Course Menu page. For example, choose areas for
Staff Information, specific content, and Course Links.
Course areas may include:
•
folders that hold content such as files, Learning Units, Assessments, and Assignments.
•
specific items such as a course syllabus.
•
External Links, which link to URLs outside of the course.
•
Course Links, which link to other areas within the course.
•
Instructors have the option to include up to 10 different areas for each course.
NOTE: Administrators may restrict options to maintain a consistent
appearance for all Courses. This may include making some areas
unavailable or setting permanent area names.
Find this page
Click Manage Course Menu from the Control Panel to open the Manage Course Menu page.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page.
TO . . .
CLICK
add a Course area
Add Course area. The Add New Area: Course area page will
appear.
add a Tool area
Add Tool Area. The Add New Area: Tool Area will appear.
add
Link
Add External Link. The Add New Area: External Link page will
appear.
an
External
...
add a Course Link
Add Course Link. The Add New Area: Course Link page will
appear.
modify an area
Modify.
remove an area
Remove. This action is irreversible.
order course areas
the drop-down arrow and select a number. Course areas will
appear in the Course Menu in the order selected.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 163 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD NEW CONTENT AREA
Overview
The Add New Content Area page enables the Instructor to add a new Course area to the Course
and choose which Course Roles will have access to the content.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add New Content Area page.
1.
Click Manage Course Menu from the Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Content Area.
Fields
The table below details the fields available on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Set Area Properties
Area Type
Indicates that this is a Course area.
Area name [r]
Select a name for the area from the drop-down list or create a new
name in the space below.
Allow
access
guest
Select the check box to make this area available to Guests in the
course.
Allow
access
observer
Select the check box to make this area available to Observers in
the course.
Make available for
Student/
Participant users
Select the check box to make this area available to users enrolled
in the course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 164 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD NEW TOOL AREA
Overview
The Add New Tool Area page enables the Instructor to add Tools to the Course Menu and choose
which users will have access.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add New Tool Area page.
1.
Click Manage Course Menu under Course Options in the Control Panel
2.
Click Add Tool Area.
Fields
The table below details the fields available on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Set Area Properties
Area Type
Select a Tool to add to the Course Menu.
Area name [r]
Enter a name for the Tool. The name entered will appear on the
Course Menu.
Make available for
Student/
Participant users
Select the check box to make this area available to users enrolled
in the course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 165 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD NEW COURSE LINK
Overview
Add a link to another part of the course to the Course Menu.
Instructors may add a link to an Assignment or an Assessment that is due. The item would then be
listed in a Course area and also on the Course Menu.
A link to the Discussion Board could be added to the Course Menu.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add Course Link page.
1.
Click Manage Course Menu under Course Options in the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Course Link.
Fields
The table below details the fields available on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Set Area Properties
Area Type
Indicates that this is a Course Link area.
Area name [r]
Enter a name for the area.
Link location
Click Browse. The Course Map will appear. Select a folder or item
within the Course Map to link to and click Submit.
Allow
access
quest
Select the check box to make this area available to guests who
view the course.
Allow
access
observer
Select the check box to make this area available to observers who
view the course.
Make available for
Student/
Participant users
Select the check box to make this area available to users enrolled
in the course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 166 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD EXTERNAL LINK
Overview
Add an External Link to the Course Menu. When users select this area in the Course Menu they
will automatically be taken to the URL linked to this area.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add External Link page.
1.
Click Manage Course Menu under Course Options in the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add External Link.
Fields
The table below details the fields available on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Set Area Properties
Area Type
Indicates that this is an External Link area.
Area name [r]
Enter a name for the area.
Target [r]
Enter a Web site address for the link to access. When adding a
URL, do so as http://www.blackboard.com, not
www.blackboard.com or blackboard.com
Launch in a new
window
Select the check box to open the URL in a new window when it is
accessed by a user.
Allow quest
access
Select the check box to make this area available to guests who
view the course.
Allow observer
access
Select the check box to make this area available to observers who
view the course.
Make available for
Student/
Participant users
Select the check box to make this area available to users enrolled
in the course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 167 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE DESIGN
Overview
Instructors manage the appearance of the Course Menu from the Course Design page. They can
choose to use buttons or text links and select colors and design features.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Course Design page.
1.
Click Course Design under Course Options.
2.
Click Course Design.
Select new style
Select Buttons to make the items in the Course Menu appear as buttons. Select Text Navigation
to make the items in the Course Menu appear as text links.
Button Style Options
Define the following options after choosing the Button Navigation Style.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Style Properties
Button Type
Choose the Button Type from the drop-down list.
Button Shape
Click an option to choose the button shape.
Button Style
Use the drop-down list to select the color of the buttons.
Select Text Style Options
Define the following options after choosing the Text Navigation Style.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Style Properties
Select
background color
for navigation
Click Pick and select a background color for the Course Menu.
Select a highlight
color
for
the
navigation
Click Pick and select a color for the text in the Course Menu.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 168 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Instructor Manual
Page 169 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE BANNER
Overview
Instructors can add a banner to the top of the Announcements area on the Course from the Course
Banner page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Course Banner page.
1.
Click Course Design in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Course Banner.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Course Banner
Current Banner
Displays the banner that currently appears at the top of the
Announcements area.
New Banner
Enter the path to the new banner file or click Browse to upload
a new course banner.
Remove this banner
Select this check box to remove the banner image from the
Course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 170 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MANAGE TOOLS
Overview
Instructors can control the availability of Tools through Manage Tools Instructors can enable tools
for use during a course and also decide which tools Guests and Observers may access.
Find this page
Click Manage Tools in the Course Options area on the Control Panel to open the Manage Tools
page.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page.
F UNCTION
D ESCRIPTION
Enable Blackboard
Tools
Select the Blackboard Tools that will be available in the course.
Enable Extension
Tools
Select Building Blocks that will be available in the course.
Enable Content
Tools
Select Content Tools that will be available in the course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 171 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ENABLE BLACKBOARD TOOLS
Overview
Course Tools appear directly on the Course Menu of the Courses tab or within areas of the Course
Menu (such as under Tools). Instructors can manage the availability of all of these Tools, such as
Collaboration Tools, the Drop Box, and Email through the Enable Blackboard Tools page.
Instructors can also choose which tools will be available for Guests and Observers to view.
NOTE: Instructors may add Tools to the Course Menu from the Manage
Course Menu page. The Enable Blackboard Tools page makes Tools
available for use within a course.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to access the Enable Blackboard Tools page.
1.
Click Manage Tools in the Course Options area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Enable Blackboard Tools.
Fields
The table below details the fields available on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Available
Check this box next to those tools that will be used in the course.
Allow Guest
Check this box next to those tools that Guests are allowed to view.
If a tool is marked with N/A then Guests cannot view it.
Allow Observer
Check this box next to those tools that Observers are allowed to
view. If a tool is marked with N/A then Observers cannot view it.
Disabling Announcements
If the Instructor disables the Announcements Tool and resets the Course Entry Point to an area
other than Announcements, course Announcements will still be available to Students from the My
Institution tab. Remove each announcement or make them unavailable to prevent users from
viewing them.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 172 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ENABLE BUILDING BLOCKS TOOLS
Overview
Building Blocks are tools added to the Blackboard Learning System. Enable Extension Tools
allows the Instructor to manage all the outside tools that the System Administrator has made
available.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to access the Enable Extension Tools page.
1.
Click Manage Tools in the Course Options area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Enable Extension Tools.
NOTE: Blocks are not available with Blackboard Learning System - Basic
Edition.
Fields
The table below details the fields available on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Enabled
Select the check box next to those tools that will be used in the
course.
Allow Guest
Select the check box next to those tools that Guests are allowed to
view. If a tool is marked with N/A then Guests cannot view it.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 173 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
ENABLE CONTENT TYPES
Overview
A Content Type is a new format for content that can be added to a course.. On this page, the
Instructor may choose which types of content may be included in the course. Content Types that
are enabled can be added throughout the course.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Enable Content Tools page.
1.
Click Manage Tools in the Course Options area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Enable Content Tools.
Enable Content Tools
Check the Enabled box next to those tools that will be used in the course. If the tool is not checked
then it will not be available.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 174 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 8—COURSE SETTINGS
Overview
Course Settings, such as availability, access and enrollment are also managed on the Course
Options area of the Control Panel.
In this chapter
This chapter contains information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Course Name and
Description
Modify the name and description of the course.
Course Availability
Select the availability of a course.
Course Duration
Determine the length of the course.
Enrollment
Determine how users will enroll in the course.
Guest and
Observer Access
Chooses whether or not this course is available to guests and
observers.
Categorize Course
Add the course to a category in the Course Catalog.
Course Entry Point
Select an entry point for the course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 175 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE NAME AND DESCRIPTION
Overview
Instructors change the name, description, and subject type of a course.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Course Name and Description page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Course Name and Description.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Course Name and Description page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Course Title/Description
Course Name
Enter the name of the course. This name will appear as the
course name throughout the Blackboard Academic Suite.
Description
Enter a description of the course.
Course Categorization
Subject Area
Select the subject area that best describes the course.
Discipline
The subject area can be further defined by discipline.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 176 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE AVAILABILITY
Overview
The Course Availability page controlls access to the course.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Course Availability page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Course Availability.
Course role availability
Select either Yes or No to make the course available to users. If the course is set to available, all
users participating in the course will have access. If the course is set to unavailable, access is
determined by course role.
NOTE: Courses that are unavailable will not appear in the Course Catalog.
Fields
The following table describes what type of access different user roles have to a course that is
unavailable:
C OURSE R OLE
A CCESS
Students
The course is not available to Students.
Instructors, Course
Builders, Teaching
Assistants,
and
Graders
Courses set to Unavailable will appear to the user. The course will
be indicated as unavailable, but will still be accessible.
WHEN COURSE IS UNAV AILABLE
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 177 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
GUEST ACCESS
Overview
The Guest Access page is used to control whether or not Guests, those users not participating in
the course, have access to the course.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Guest Access page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Guest Access.
Guest Access
Select either Yes or No to make the course available for Guests to view.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 178 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
OBSERVER ACCESS
Overview
Instructors decide if Observers have access to the course A person with an Observer role is
assigned to follow a specific user on the Blackboard Learning System without interacting with the
system.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Observer Access page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Observer Access.
Allow Observers
Select Yes in the Allow Observers: field to allow Observers to access the course.
When set to Yes, Observers can access content in the course. Observers cannot access
Assessments or Assignments.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 179 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE DURATION
Overview
Instructors set the length of the course from the Course Duration page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Course Duration page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Course Duration.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Course Duration page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Set Course Duration
Continuous
Select this option to make the course always available.
Select Dates
Select this option to set the course availability for specific
dates. The course may also begin on a specific date and not
have a specific end date.
After the end date, the course is no longer available for
Students but is otherwise unchanged.
Days (from the date of
enrollment)
Select this option to place a time limit on a self-paced course.
The course will be available for that number of days from the
time a Student enrolls.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 180 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ENROLLMENT OPTIONS
Overview
Instructors can lead enrollment by processing enrollment requests from Students through the
Control Panel. Enrollment can also be limited to a set time and to require an access code.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Enrollment Options page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Enrollment Options.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Enrollment Options page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Enrollment Options
Instructor/Admin
Select this option to make course enrollment Instructor led.
Select the check box to create a link for Students to email an
enrollment request to the Instructor. The link appears in the
course catalog.
Self Enrollment
Select this option to allow Students to enroll in a course.
Start Date
Select this option to set an enrollment start date. If Self
Enrollment is selected this date is required.
End Date
Select this option to set an enrollment end date. If Self
Enrollment is selected this date is required.
Require Access Code
to Enroll
Select this option to require an access code to enroll. Enter
an access code that must then be distributed to approved
Students. This access code will be required for Students to
enroll in the course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 181 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CATEGORIZE COURSE
Overview
Instructors indicate where in the Course Catalog the course will appear from the Categorize Course
page. The Instructor may select multiple categories.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Categorize Course page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Categorize Course.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Categorize Course page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Categorize Course
Add Category
Select a catalog category. Click Add. More than one category
may be selected. Repeat the process to add another
category. The course will appear under the selected
categories.
Currently
In
Displays the catalog categories that have been selected.
Categorized
To remove a category, click Remove next to the category
that is to be removed.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 182 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
SET COURSE ENTRY POINT
Overview
The default course entry point is the Announcements page. In some courses, it may be
advantageous to change the entry point to another area. This can be done on the Set Course Entry
Point page.
NOTE: Setting a new course entry point takes effect immediately. However,
the user that sets the new course entry point will not see the effect of the
change until the user logs out of the Blackboard Learning System and logs
back in.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Set Course Entry Point page.
1.
Select Settings in Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Set Course Entry Point.
Field
Click the drop-down arrow in the Entry Point field and choose the course area that will appear
when a user enters the course.
If the Course Entry Point is changed, the Instructor must clear the cache or refresh the system to
view the change. To refresh on Internet Explorer go to View and click Shift + Refresh. On
Macintosh select Shift + Refresh.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 183 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 9—COPY, IMPORT, ARCHIVE AND RECYCLE
Overview
Course Options also includes tools to copy a course, archive or recycle the course, and import
content.
In this chapter
This chapter contains information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Recycle Course
Recycle a course by selecting areas to keep and areas to remove.
Course Copy
Copy courses taught by the same Instructor.
Import Package
Add a package containing an exported course the current course.
Export Course
Export course areas to save and use at a later time.
Archive Course
Create an incremental backup of a specific course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 184 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
RECYCLE COURSE
Overview
The Recycle Course page is a useful tool for Instructors to use at the end of a course. It allows
Instructors to select information to be deleted from a course and keeps the rest of the course areas
for use in the future. For example, remove Students and grades but keep content.
The Course Recycler will remove all users with a role of Student from the course. Teaching
Assistants, Graders, and Course Builders will not be removed.
NOTE: Use Archive Course to create a permanent record of the course
before recycling.
Find this page
Click Recycle Course in Course Options on the Control Panel to open the Recycle Course page.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Content Materials to Remove
Select the check boxes for areas within the course that will be deleted. For example, if Staff
Information is selected all of the data within Staff Information will be deleted.
Select Other Course Materials to Remove
Select the check boxes for areas within the course that will be deleted. For example, if
Discussion Board is selected all of the Discussion Boards in the course will be deleted.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 185 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COPY COURSE
Overview
Copy Course can be used in several different ways:
•
Copy selected course materials into a new course to create a new section of the same
course.
•
Copy selected course materials into an existing course to share content across several
courses without having to recreate the content in each course.
•
Copy just enrollments (or enrollments and selected content and tools) to easily move
users from one sequential course to the next course.
•
Create an exact copy of a course, including enrollments and Student interactions.
NOTE: A user can only copy materials into a course where the Instructor
has a role of Instructor, Teaching Assistant, or Course Builder.
Find this page
Select Copy Course on the Control Panel to open the Copy Course page.
Available functions
The following functions are accessible from the Copy Course page.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
Copy some or all of the
course materials into a
new course
Copy Course Materials into a New Course
Copy some or all of the
course materials into an
existing course
Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course
Make an exact copy of
the course
including
enrollments
Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy)
Content System items
When a course is copied, links to Content Collection items within the course are included. The
permissions to these items must be updated so users in the new course can successfully access
these links. See the topic Course Copy and Content System Items for additional information.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 186 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COPY COURSE MATERIALS INTO A NEW COURSE
Overview
Copying course materials into a new course creates a course in the system and populates it with
content from a course already on the system. The Course Menu specified in the source course will
replace the default Course Menu in the new course.
Find this page
Follow these steps to locate the Copy Course Materials into a New Course page.
1.
Click Course Copy from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Copy Course Materials into a New Course from the Copy Course page.
Destination Course ID
Enter a Course ID for the new course that will be created and populated with content from the
current course. Please make sure that the new Course ID matches the naming convention used at
the institution. Also, The Course ID should not have any spaces or characters other than numbers
and letters, dash (-), underscore (_), and period (.). The Course ID must be unique and remain
static. It cannot be modified.
Select course materials
Select the check boxes for each course area and tool in the course that should be copied into the
new course. The table below details what happens to each selectable option when the copy is
performed.
NOTE: A Course Copy operation cannot be completed if the user does not
select at least one of the following areas: Content, Staff Information or
Settings. If none of these options is selected a warning will appear.
C OURSE M ATERIAL
B EHAVIOR
Content
Copies course materials, including uploaded files,
Learning Units, links, and Course Cartridge content
(including content that is copy protected). Users may
also select to include Course Information, Course
documents, Assignments, and External Links.
Announcements
All Announcements are copied to the new course.
This option must be selected or the links in
Announcements to Assessments will be broken.
Tests, Surveys, and Pools
All Assessments and Surveys, including questions
and options for deploying them are copied. All Pools
are copied to the new course.
Calendar
All Calendar events are copied to the new course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
WHEN COPIED
Page 187 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
C OURSE M ATERIAL
B EHAVIOR
Collaboration Sessions
Copies Collaboration Sessions.
Course Settings
Some Course Settings will be copied. See Course
Settings below for more information.
Discussion Board
Discussion Board forums, including the initial posts in
each forum, are copied to the new course.
Gradebook Items and Settings
Items in the Gradebook, and their settings, such as
type, categories, and display options, are copied to
the new course.
Group Settings
Settings include the names of the Groups, the
settings for tool availability, and the Discussion Board
forum names.
Staff Information
All Staff Information is copied to the new course.
WHEN COPIED
Course Settings
When Course Settings is selected, certain settings are copied to the new course. These include the
following:
•
Course Name
•
Course Description
•
Course Entry Point
•
Course Design
•
Course Banner
•
Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings are not overwritten.
The following settings are not copied as part of this operation:
•
Course ID
•
Course Availability
•
Guest Access
•
Observer Access
•
Course Duration
•
Enrollment Options
Select Enrollments
If Enrollment is selected, the list of users in the course will be copied.
User records in the course will not be copied. This includes the following:
•
Gradebook Records
•
Discussion Board posts (including Groups Discussion Board posts)
•
Archived Discussion Board messages (including Groups Discussion Board posts)
•
Drop Box files
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 188 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
•
Assessment attempts
•
Assignment submissions
•
Course Statistics
•
Collaboration session logs
•
User Home pages
•
The Electric Blackboard® entries
Instructor Manual
User records are only copied if the Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy) option is selected.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 189 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COPY COURSE MATERIALS INTO AN EXISTING COURSE
Overview
The Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course page enables Instructors to copy content from
one course into another they are teaching. Instructors can select areas, such as Announcements,
Staff Information or Course areas to copy. Copy Course will add content to a course, but it will not
remove existing content.
Find this page
Follow these steps to locate the Copy Course Materials into a New Course page.
1.
Click Course Copy from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Copy Course Materials into an Existing Course from the Copy Course page.
Destination Course ID
Enter a Course ID for the destination course or click Browse to open a Search function in a
separate window.
Select course materials
Select the check boxes for each course area and tool in the course that should be copied into the
existing course. The table below details what happens to each selectable option when the copy is
performed.
NOTE: A Course Copy operation cannot be completed if the user does not
select at least one of the following areas: Content, Staff Information or
Settings. If none of these options is selected a warning will appear.
C OURSE M ATERIAL
B EHAVIOR
Content
Copies course materials, including uploaded files,
Learning Units, links, and Course Cartridge content
(including content that is copy protected). Users may
also select to include Course Information, Course
documents, Assignments, and External Links.
Announcements
All Announcements are copied to the new course.
This option must be selected or the links in
Announcements to Assessments will be broken.
Tests, Surveys, and Pools
All Assessments and Surveys, including questions
and options for deploying them are copied. All Pools
are copied to the new course.
Calendar
All Calendar events are copied to the new course.
Collaboration Sessions
Collaboration Sessions.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
WHEN COPIED
Page 190 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
C OURSE M ATERIAL
B EHAVIOR
Course Settings
Some Course Settings will be copied. See Course
Settings below for more information.
Discussion Board
Discussion Board forums, including the initial posts in
each forum, are copied to the new course.
Gradebook Items and Settings
Items in the Gradebook, and their settings, such as
type, categories, and display options, are copied to
the new course.
Group Settings
Settings include the names of the Groups, the
settings for tool availability, and the Discussion Board
forum names.
Staff Information
All Staff Information is copied to the new course.
WHEN COPIED
Course Settings
When Course Settings is selected, certain settings are copied to the existing course. These
include the following:
•
Course Entry Point
•
Course Design
•
Course Banner
•
Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings are not overwritten.
The following settings are not copied as part of this operation:
•
Course ID
•
Course Name
•
Course Description
•
Course Availability
•
Guest Access
•
Observer Access
•
Course Duration
•
Enrollment Options
Resolving Course Menu items
When copying content and tools from one course to an existing course, the Course Menu must
resolve itself in the destination course. The table below describes the how Course Menu items are
resolved.
IF . . .
THEN
a Course area in the source course does
not exist in the destination course
the area will be added to the Course Menu
in the destination course.
the Course area in the source course and
the content from the source course will be
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 191 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
IF . . .
THEN
the Course area in the destination course
have the same name and are of the same
type (for example, External Links, Staff
Information, or content)
added, but will not replace, the content in the
area within the destination course.
...
the Course area in the source course and
the Course area in the destination course
have the same name but are of different
types
the Course area from the source course will
be added to the destination course under a
different name. The new name will append
an incremental numeral to the name (for
example, Course Materials will become
Course Materials1).
Links
Links to parts of a course that are not included in the copy will break when the links appear in the
destination course. For example, if there is a link to a Test in a course area and Assessments are
not copied, the link to the test will break.
Course Cartridge content
If the source course includes Course Cartridge content and the destination course does not have a
Cartridge ID, the cartridge content will be copied to the destination course with the Cartridge ID
assigned. This includes content that is copy protected.
If the destination course already has a Cartridge ID, neither the cartridge content nor the Cartridge
ID will be copied from the source course to the destination course.
Select Enrollments
If Enrollment is selected, the list of users in the course will be copied.
User records in the course will not be copied. This includes the following:
•
Gradebook Records
•
Discussion Board posts (including Groups Discussion Board posts)
•
Archived Discussion Board messages (including Groups Discussion Board posts)
•
Drop Box files
•
Assessment attempts
•
Assignment submissions
•
Course Statistics
•
Collaboration session logs
•
User Home pages
•
The Electric Blackboard® entries
User records are only copied if the Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy) option is selected.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 192 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Instructor Manual
Page 193 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
COPY COURSE WITH USERS (EXACT COPY)
Overview
Copy Course with Users performs a complete copy of the course. This is the only Copy option that
copies user records, such as grades and Discussion Board posts, to the new course. This option is
useful if a course is split into multiple sections. The Instructor may do an exact copy and then unenroll specific students to create two sections of the same course.
Find this page
Follow these steps to locate the Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy).
1.
Click Course Copy from the Control Panel.
2.
Click Copy Course with Users (Exact Copy) from the Copy Course page.
Copy the Course
Enter the Course ID for the Destination Course and select Submit. The new course will contain all
of the same content and all of the same user enrollments and staff assignments as the current
course.
Please make sure that the new Course ID matches the naming convention used at the institution.
Also, the Course ID should not have any spaces or characters other than numbers and letters,
dash (-), underscore (_), and period (.). The Course ID must be unique and remain static. It cannot
be modified.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 194 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
IMPORT PACKAGE
Overview
Instructors may use the Import Package page to upload course materials from another course. For
example, if they have exported a course they may import the whole course package, or selected
parts of the course through Import Package.
Never upload an Exported Course package that has been modified since it was created and
downloaded. Opening the .ZIP file and changing any of the files in the Exported Course package
will result in unstable and unpredictable behavior when the course is imported.
Find this Page
Click Import Package under Course Options on the Control Panel to open the Import Course
Cartridge page.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Import Package page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select a Course
Destination Course ID
Displays the Course ID for the course.
Select a Package
Please Browse for the
location
of
the
packaged course
Either enter the path to the course package or click Browse to
search for the course package.
Course areas
Select the option for each course area and tool in the course that should be imported. The
Select course materials section below details these options.
Select course materials
The table below details what happens to each selectable option when the import is performed.
C OURSE M ATERIAL
B EHAVIOR
Content
Imports course materials, including the following, from
the package:
WHEN COPIED
• Uploaded files
• Learning Units
• Links
• Course Information
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 195 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
C OURSE M ATERIAL
B EHAVIOR
WHEN COPIED
• Course Documents
• Assignments
• External Links
• Building Block content
Announcements
All Announcements are imported. If Assessment links
appear in Course areas, then this option must be
selected, or the link to the Assessment will be broken.
Tests, Surveys, and Pools
All Assessments and Surveys, including questions
and options for deploying them are imported. All
Pools are imported to the new course.
Calendar
All Calendar items are imported to the new course.
Course Settings
Some Course Settings will be imported. See Course
Setting below for more information.
Discussion Board
Discussion Board forums, including the initial
message in the Discussion Board, are imported.
Gradebook Items and Settings
Items in the Gradebook, and their settings, such as
type, categories, and display options, are imported.
Group Settings
Settings include the names of the Groups, the
settings for tool availability, and the Discussion Board
forum names.
Staff Information
All Staff Information is imported.
Course Settings
When Course Settings is selected, certain settings are imported to the course. These include the
following:
•
Course Name
•
Course Description
•
Course Entry Point
•
Course Design
•
Course Banner
Tools settings that do not exist are added. Existing settings are not overwritten.
The following settings are not imported as part of this operation:
•
Course ID
•
Course Availability
•
Guest Access
•
Observer Access
•
Course Duration
•
Enrollment Options
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 196 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
Resolving the Course Menu items
When importing a package, the Course Menu must resolve itself in the destination course. The
table below describes the how Course Menu items are resolved.
IF . . .
THEN
...
a Course area in the package does not
exist in the destination course
the area will be added to the Course Menu
in the destination course.
the Course area in the package and the
Course area in the destination course
have the same name and are of the same
type (for example, External Links, Staff
Information, or content)
the content from the package will be added,
but will not replace, the content in the area
within the destination course.
the Course area in the package and the
Course area in the destination course
have the same name but are of different
types
the Course area from the package will be
added to the destination course under a
different name. The new name will append
an incremental numeral to the name (for
example, Course Materials will become
Course Materials1).
Course Links
Links to parts of a course that are not included in the export package will break when the links
appear in the destination course. For example, if there is a link to a Test in a course area and
Tests, Surveys and Pools are not exported, the link to the Test will break.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 197 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
EXPORT COURSE
Overview
The Export Course feature creates a package of the course content that can later be imported and
used to teach another course with the same content. It is important to note that, unlike the Archive
Course feature, Export Course does not include any user interactions with the course—it only
includes the content and the tools.
Export packages are downloaded as compressed .ZIP files and are imported in the same format.
Do not unzip an Export package or remove files from the package, otherwise the package will not
be imported correctly.
Find this page
Click Export Course in Course Options on the Control Panel to open the Export Course page.
Exporting a Course
A receipt page will appear after selecting Course Materials and clicking Submit. The exported
package must be downloaded from this page and saved to the local computer. Select Click here to
download the generated package file to save the file. The package will not be saved in the
Blackboard Learning System! If the package is not downloaded from this page it will be lost and the
export operation must be repeated.
Select course materials
The table below details what happens to each selectable option when the export is performed.
C OURSE M ATERIAL
B EHAVIOR
Content
Exports course materials, including uploaded files,
Learning Units, and links. Users may also select to
include Course Information, Course documents,
Assignments and External Links.
Announcements
All Announcements are exported. If Assessment links
appear in Course areas, then this option must be
selected, or the link to the Assessment will be broken.
Tests, Surveys, and Pools
All Assessments and Surveys, including questions
and options for deploying them are imported. All
Pools are exported to the new course.
Calendar
All Calendar items are exported to the new course.
Course Settings
Some Course Settings will be exported. See Course
Setting below for more information.
Discussion Board
Discussion Board forums, including the initial
message in the Discussion Board, are exported.
Gradebook Items and Settings
Items in the Gradebook, and their settings, such as
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
WHEN
E XPORTED
Page 198 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
C OURSE M ATERIAL
B EHAVIOR
WHEN
E XPORTED
type, categories, and display options, are exported.
Group Settings
Settings include the names of the Groups, the
settings for tool availability, and the Discussion Board
forum names.
Staff Information
All Staff Information is exported.
Course Settings
When Course Settings is selected, certain settings are exported. These include the following:
•
Course Name
•
Course Description
•
Course Entry Point
•
Course Design
•
Course Banner
•
Blackboard Tools
•
Building Block Tools
•
Content Tools
•
Course ID
•
Course Availability
•
Guest Access
•
Observer Access
•
Course Duration
•
Enrollment Options
NOTE: For information on which settings are included in an import
operation, see the Import Package topic.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 199 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
ARCHIVE COURSE
Overview
Archive Course creates a permanent record of a course including all the content and user
interactions. Archived Courses are a permanent record of the course.
Archived courses are saved as .zip files. Archiving a course does not remove it from the system.
Find this page
Open the Control Panel and click Archive Course in Course Options to open the Archive Course
page.
Create Archive
Select Submit to export the course contents and save it for future use.
On the following page, select Click here to download the generated package file to save the file.
The package will not be saved in the Blackboard Learning System! If the package is not
downloaded from this page it will be lost and the export operation must be repeated.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 200 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 10—COURSE CARTRIDGES
Overview
Course Cartridges allows Instructors to access sets of teaching tools provided by academic
publishers. Chalk Titles are Course Cartridges that are integrated with external applications and
content from publishers
In this chapter
This chapter contains information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Import Course
Cartridges
Explains how to add Course Cartridges to the course.
About Chalk Titles
Provides and explanation of Chalk Titles and their features. Also
gives tips in troubleshooting.
Manage Chalk
Titles
Explains how to manage Chalk Titles within a course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 201 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
IMPORT COURSE CARTRIDGE
Overview
Course Cartridges enable Instructors to gain access to complete sets of teaching tools provided by
academic publishers. In one central location, Instructors can find relevant, publisher-created
materials. Once the materials are downloaded to a Blackboard Learning System Course,
Instructors are free to customize the content by adding and deleting materials as needed to
correlate with specific topics covered in the classroom.
Course Cartridges can serve as supplements to existing online courses, or provide an excellent
start for faculty who are just beginning to develop online teaching strategies. Instructors will benefit
from the ease of use, variety, and professional quality of the materials available on Course
Cartridges.
Instructors download Course Cartridges from the Course Cartridge Repository and install cartridges
into Courses through the Control Panel.
Find this Page
Click Import Course Cartridge in Course Options on the Control Panel to open the Import Course
Cartridge page.
Field
Enter the Course Cartridge Download Key in the field provided. Course Cartridge content will be
added to course materials.
NOTE: The Download Key can be obtained from the publisher. Without a
Download Key, it is not possible to add Course Cartridge content.
Copy Protection
Cartridges may be designated as Copy Protected or Open Access. Only one Copy Protected
cartridge may exist in a course. Open Access cartridges may be downloaded by Instructors into
courses that already contain cartridge content. Therefore, a course may contain one Copy
Protected cartridge and multiple Open Access cartridges.
Download a Course Cartridge
Follow the steps below to download a Course Cartridge.
1.
Select a textbook with a companion Course Cartridge by browsing the Course Cartridge
Catalog, located at http://cartridgecatalog.blackboard.com/catalog/
2.
Obtain the Instructor Download Key from the textbook publisher.
3.
Begin the Course creation process.
4.
During the course creation process, enter the Instructor Download Key obtained in Step 2.
5.
Click Submit to create the course.
6.
An email will arrive when the Course Cartridge has finished loading into your new course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 202 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
How Students access course cartridges
Students must follow the steps below to access the Course Cartridge materials.
1.
Enroll Students in the Course.
2.
Instruct Students to purchase required textbook or other publisher provided materials that
contain the Access Key.
3.
When first accessing the Course content, Students will be required to enter an Access
Key. Once validated, Students will no longer need the Access Key.
Cartridge functionality
Course Cartridges function in the following ways:
•
Archive: When a course is archived all cartridge content in the course is saved with the
archive.
•
Restore: When an archived course is restored by the System Administrator, the cartridge
content is included in the restored course.
•
Export: When a course is exported, cartridge content is not included.
•
Import: The only time cartridge content is included during a course import, is if it is part of
the package.
•
Copy: Cartridge content is included during a course copy action. For example, if cartridge
content is included in a Course area, and Content is selected during Course Copy, the
cartridge content will be copied.
NOTE: Content from only one Copy Protected cartridge may be copied into
a course. If content from a second Copy Protected cartridge is copied
(from another course) or imported, it will over-write the existing Copy
Protected cartridge content.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 203 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
ABOUT CHALK TITLES
Overview
Chalk Titles are Course Cartridges that are integrated with external applications and content from
publishers. Chalk Titles include both content and tools. Tools included in a Chalk Title connect to
an outside source to run each tool.
Chalk Titles are installed in the same way as other Course Cartridges. Like other Course
Cartridges, Chalk Titles require a download key and student access keys.
Important features in Chalk Titles include:
•
Integration with the course: Chalk Titles link courses to applications running on the
publisher's servers. These applications are often popular tools that are familiar to
Instructors. Please contact the publisher for more information about the applications
included with a Chalk Title.
•
Single Sign-on: Users that are logged into the course are logged into the publisher
applications linked to the course. Users pass between the course and the publisher
application seamlessly.
•
Roster synchronization: Users enrolled in the course are automatically enrolled in the
publisher application.
•
Grade passing: Grades from the publisher application are passed to the course.
Chalk Title tools appear in the Tools area of the Control Panel after a Chalk Title is added to a
course. Instructors can restrict availability to Chalk Title tools in the same way that they can restrict
availability to other tools.
The System Administrator may restrict the availability of Chalk Title tools in all courses. By default,
Instructors can use Chalk Title tools in courses.
Chalk Title Tools can synch with the Gradebook in a course to report Student performance. Note
that Student attempts are stored on the server that runs the tool, not within the course. Therefore,
Student attempts are not included when the course is archived. The reported grade is the only
recorded information about a Student attempt.
Chalk Title tools will not work if a course that contains Chalk Title tools is exported or archived and
later added to system that does not support Chalk Titles.
Troubleshooting
It is important to remember when reporting problems with a Chalk Title that Chalk Title tools and
content are linked to outside servers hosted by publishers. In many cases, the problem may be with
the publisher server. Make sure to let the System Administrator know that a problem is related to
Chalk Title tool.
Privacy Settings
To fully use links added to a course by a Chalk Title, the user's browser settings must be set to
Accept All Cookies or to be set to accept cookies from Chalk provider’s server.
If the browser privacy settings are set on Medium or High, cookies from third party content,
including Chalk applications, are silently blocked. Users will receive an error message when
attempting to access some of the links for a Chalk Title.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 204 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
The privacy settings can be maintained at Medium or High if the user specifically sets the browser
to accept cookies from the Chalk provider’s server. Contact the Chalk Title publisher for additional
information.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 205 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MANAGE CHALK TITLES
Overview
It is important to consider user privacy when making a Chalk Title available to Students. Outside
servers use personal information, such as name and email address to provide the tool and link the
tool with the Gradebook.
The Manage Chalk Title page presents options for controlling access to personal information.
Instructors can require Students to fill out an authorization form before accessing a Chalk Title.
Instructors receive a privacy notice when they first access a Chalk Title. This message can be set
to display each time an Instructor accesses a Chalk Title. It is a good idea to display this message
each time if more than one user is responsible for teaching a course.
Find this page
Click Manage Chalk Title from the Control Panel.
Fields
The following fields appear on the Manage Chalk Title page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Define Privacy Policy
Does each student need to
provide online authorization
before that student's personal
information can be displayed
to the Publisher?
Select Yes to require authorization from Students to
release their personal information to the publisher's
server.
Specify your preference
Should Instructors see a
Privacy Notice each time they
request a Publisher Resource?
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Select Yes to display the privacy notice each time an
Instructor accesses a Chalk Title tool.
Page 206 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 11—USER MANAGEMENT
Overview
Instructors can manage the users in their Courses. For example, Instructors may:
•
add and drop individuals or groups of Students to and from a course
•
create new users
•
create groups of users within in a course
Some options for managing users may be turned off by the System Administrator.
In this chapter
This chapter contains information on the following sections:
T OPIC
D ESCRIPTION
List/Modify Users
Explains how to update user information.
Create User
Provides information on creating user accounts.
Batch Create Users
for Course
Describes the function to create a set of users for a course.
Enroll User
Explains how to enroll users in a course.
Remove Users
from the Course
Explains how Instructors remove users from the course.
Manage Groups
Provides information for creating and modifying groups of users
within a course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 207 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
LIST/MODIFY USERS
Overview
User Management enables the Instructor to manage the users in their Course. The List/Modify
Users page enables Instructors to change a user’s role within a course and update user profiles.
Instructors can also send email to a user.
If the User is unavailable, that user cannot access the Blackboard Learning System. If the User
Enrollment record is unavailable, the user can access the system but cannot access the course.
Icons to denote a state of unavailable will appear next to the User Name if applicable to the User
record. If applicable to the User Enrollment record, the icon will appear next to the User Role.
User records or User Enrollment records that are set to Unavailable are preceded by a circle
symbol with a slash through it. Also, the record will appear in gray text with the exception of the
email address, which may still be clicked to send a message to the user. To make a record
available, click Properties to modify the User Enrollment record and change the availability setting.
Find this page
To open the List/Modify Users page, select List/Modify Users in the User Management area on
the Control Panel.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on the List/Modify Users page after generating a list
of users.
TO . . .
CLICK .
send an email to a user
the email address to open the Compose Email page.
edit a user password
Password.
edit a user profile
Properties.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
..
Page 208 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHANGE PASSWORD
Overview
Instructors can update a user’s password from the Change Password page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Change Password page.
1.
Select List/Modify Users in the User Management area of the Control Panel.
2.
Search for a user.
3.
Click Change Password next to a user.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Change Password page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Change Password
Password [r]
Enter the new password.
Verify
[r]
Re-enter the new password.
Password
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 209 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CREATE USER AND MODIFY USER
Overview
Instructors can create a profile for a user on the Create User page. Creating a user within a Course
also enrolls the user in the Course.
After creating a user, Instructors can update a user’s profile information, including the Course role,
from the Modify User Properties page.
NOTE: The names of these fields can be changed by the System
Administrator. If a link appears at the top of this page it will connect to
another information system where some of the values that appear on this
page may be edited.
Find this page
Click Create User in User Management on the Control Panel to open the Create User page.
Follow the steps below to open the Modify User Properties page.
1.
Select List/Modify Users in the User Management area of the Control Panel.
2.
Search for a user.
3.
Click Properties next to a user.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Create User page and the Modify User page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Personal Information
First Name [r]
Enter the user’s first name.
Middle Name
Enter the user’s middle name.
Last Name [r]
Enter the user’s last name.
Email [r]
Enter the user’s email address.
Student ID
Enter the user’s Student ID as defined by the institution.
Account Information
Username [r]
Enter a user name for the new user. Do not use special characters
in the user name. When creating attributes a good rule to follow is
only use alphanumeric characters, underscores, dots, and dashes.
This field is required.
Password
Enter a password for the user’s account. The password must be at
least one character and contain no spaces or special characters.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 210 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Verify Password
Enter the password again. Use the Change Password page to
change the password of an existing user.
Other Information
Gender
Enter the user’s gender.
Birthdate
Select the user’s birthday.
Education Level
Enter the user’s education level.
Company
Enter the user’s company.
Job Title
Enter the user’s job title.
Department
Enter the user’s department.
Street 1
Enter the user’s address.
Street 2
Enter any additional address information.
City
Enter the user’s city.
State/Province
Enter the user’s state or province.
ZIP/Postal Code
Enter the user’s ZIP code or postal code.
Country
Enter the user’s country.
Web Site
Enter the URL of the user’s personal Web site. When adding a
URL,
do
so
as
http://www.blackboard.com,
not
www.blackboard.com or blackboard.com
Home Phone
Enter the home phone number of the user. The phone number will
display exactly as entered.
Work Phone
Enter the work phone number of the user. The phone number will
display exactly as entered.
Work Fax
Enter the fax of the user. The fax number will display exactly as
entered.
Mobile Phone
Enter the mobile phone of the user. The phone number will display
exactly as entered.
Role and Availability
Role
Availability
and
Select a role option. Available roles are:
• Student: User is able to access all available Course content
and will be graded on Assessments.
• Instructor: User is able to control all aspects of the course
through the Control Panel.
• Teacher’s Assistant: User is able to control most aspects
of the course through the Control Panel.
• Grader: User is able to access all areas under
Assessments.
• Course Builder: User is able to add content to the course
through the Control Panel.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 211 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
• Guest: Guests are able to view areas of the course, but
cannot participate in any way.
Available
(this
course only)
Select Yes or No from the drop-down list. If Yes is selected, the
user will have access to the Course. If No is selected, the user will
not be able to access the Course. This option can be modified after
the user is created to control access throughout the user’s
involvement with the course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 212 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
BATCH CREATE USERS FOR COURSE PAGE
Overview
Instructors may quickly add numbers of users to the course from the Batch Create Users for
Course page. Users can be added with any Course Role.
NOTE: If using a batch file created for a previous version of the Blackboard
Learning System, verify that the fields are in the correct order for the
current version.
Find this page
Click Batch Create Users for Course in User Management on the Control Panel to open the
Batch Create Users for Course page.
Batch files
Batch files are .txt files that hold large quantities of information to upload to the system. Each batch
utility contains specific instructions on creating the batch file. The following batch file standards are
universal.
•
Fields must be enclosed in double quotes.
Example: “John”
•
Each field must be separated with a delimiter. Commas, colons or tabs may be used;
however, you may not use more than one as a delimiter in a batch file.
Example:
“John”,”Smith”
•
Each record must be separated by a hard return.
Example:
“John”,”Smith”
“Larry”,”Smith”
•
Each batch file should not exceed 500 records due to time out restrictions associated with
most browsers.
•
Do not include blank lines between records. The blank line will be processed and return
an error.
•
If quotation marks appear in a field, it is necessary to use an escape character so the
process knows that the next character does not mark the end of the field. The escape
character is a backslash (\). For example, "\"NICKNAME\"".
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 213 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Batch Create Users for Course page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
File Upload
File Location
Enter the location of the batch user file.
Delimiter Type of Your
File
Select Comma, Tab, or Colon delimiter for the file. Select
Automatic and the delimiter will be determined automatically.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 214 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
ENROLL USER
Overview
Instructors may enroll an existing user into the course using the Enroll User page.
Find this page
Click Enroll User in User Management on the Control Panel to open the Enroll User page.
Enroll Users
Select the check box next to the names of the users to enroll and click Submit.
Only 20 names will appear on a page. If more the 20 users are found during the search, multiple
pages may be viewed. Instructors may only select and submit users from one page at a time. For
example, if the search returns three pages of users, the Instructor must select the users to add on
the first page and click Submit before continuing to the next page.
Users are enrolled with a Course role of Student by default.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 215 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
REMOVE USERS FROM THE COURSE
Overview
Instructors may remove users from a course. When a user is removed from a course all of the
information associated with the user, such as, Gradebook information, Drop Box files, is removed.
NOTE: Removed users cannot be restored to the course. To restore a
removed user, the user must be enrolled in the course again.
Find this page
Click Remove Users from the Course in the User Management area of the Control Panel to open
the Remove User from the Course page.
Select the check box next to the names of the users to remove and type Yes in the field at the
bottom of the page. A message will appear verifying that the user should be removed. This action is
irreversible.
Only 20 names will appear on a page. If more the 20 users are found during the search, multiple
pages may be viewed. Instructors may only select and remove users from one page at a time. For
example, if the search returns three pages of users, the Instructor must select the users to remove
on the first page and click Submit before continuing to the next page.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 216 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MANAGE GROUPS
Overview
On the Manage Groups page Instructors can build study or project groups. Instructors can also
remove and modify groups from this page. The Instructor has the option of giving the group access
to these features:
•
Discussion Board
•
Virtual Classroom
•
Group File Exchange
•
Group Email
The features that are chosen are displayed on the Manage Groups page under the group name.
Find this page
Click Manage Groups in User Management on the Control Panel to open the Manage Groups
page.
Functions
The table below details the available functions on this page.
TO . . .
CLICK .
..
add a group
Add Group. The Add Group page will appear.
Once a Group has been created Students must be added. Click
Modify to access the Manage Group page and add users to
that group.
modify a group
Modify. A Manage Group page will appear. On the Manage
Group page group properties may be modified, new Students
may be added, Group users may be listed or modified, and
users may be removed from the group.
remove a group
Remove. This action is irreversible.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 217 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD GROUP / GROUP PROPERTIES
Overview
Groups are created on the Add Group page. These options may be modified on the Group
Properties page.
Find this page
From the Manage Groups page:
1.
Click Add Group to create a new group.
2.
Click Modify to change the properties for a specific group.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Main Group Information
Group name
Enter a Group name.
Description
Enter a description of the Group.
Group Options
Enable
Discussion
Function
Group
Board
Select this check box to indicate that this Group will have
access to the Discussion Board functions.
If this check box is not selected this Group will not have access
to the Discussion Board functions.
Enable Group Virtual
Classroom Function
Select this check box to indicate that this Group will have
access to the Virtual Classroom functions.
Enable Group File
Exchange Function
Select this check box to indicate that this Group will have
access to the group file exchange function.
Enable Group Email
Function
Select this check box to indicate that this Group will have
access to the group email function.
Make
now
Click Yes to make the group available.
group
visible
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 218 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MODIFY GROUP
Overview
Once a Group is created Instructors can modify the group and assign users. The Instructor has the
option of giving the Group Discussion Board functions, Virtual Classroom functions, group file
exchange functions, and group email functions.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Manage Group page.
1.
Click Manage Groups in the User Management area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Modify next to a Group.
Functions
The following functions are available from the Manage Group page:
F UNCTION
D ESCRIPTION
Group Properties
Modify the Group name, description, or options.
Add Users to Group
Add Students to the group.
List Users in Group
List or modify users in a Group.
Remove
Users
From Group
Remove users from a Group.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 219 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
ADD USERS TO GROUP
Overview
Users are added to the Group using the Add Users to Group page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Add Users to Group page.
1.
Click Manage Groups in the User Management area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Modify next to a Group.
3.
Click Add Users to Group.
Add a User to a Group
Once the search has been completed, select the check box next to a user to add to the Group and
click Submit.
Only 20 names will appear on a page. If more the 20 users are found during the search, multiple
pages may be viewed. Instructors may only select and submit users from one page at a time. For
example, if the search returns three pages of users, the Instructor must select the users to add on
the first page and click Submit before continuing to the next page.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 220 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
LIST USERS IN GROUP
Overview
Users in a Group can be viewed and contacted using the List Users in Group page. Click on an
email address to send a message to that user.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the List Users in Group page.
1.
Click Manage Groups in the User Management area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Modify next to a Group.
3.
Click List Users in Group.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 221 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
REMOVE USERS FROM GROUP
Overview
Instructors may drop users from a Group. If a user is removed from a Group all of the information
associated with that user, such as files in the File Exchange and Discussion Board messages, is
removed. Removed users cannot be restored to the Group. Removed users must be added again.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Remove Users From Group page.
1.
Click Manage Groups in the User Management area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Modify next to a Group.
3.
Click Remove Users From Group.
Remove a User from the Group
Select the check boxes of the users to remove. Type Yes in the entry field at the bottom of the
page and click Submit. The selected users and all information associated with those users will be
removed from the Group. This action is irreversible.
Only 20 names will appear on a page. If more the 20 users are found during the search, multiple
pages may be viewed. Instructors may only select and remove users from one page at a time. For
example, if the search returns three pages of users, the Instructor must select the users to remove
on the first page and click Submit before continuing to the next page.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 222 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 12 – ASSESSMENT
Overview
Instructors use Assessments to test Student knowledge, measure Student progress, and gather
information from Students. There are two types of Assessments:
•
Tests – Tests are created to check the knowledge and skill level of users enrolled in the
course. Tests permit the Instructor to assign point values to each question on exams or
quizzes. When a Student completes a Test it is submitted for grading. The results are
recorded in the Gradebook.
•
Surveys – Surveys are useful for polling purposes, evaluations, and random checks of
knowledge. They function in the same way as Tests and offer most of the same options.
Questions on Surveys are not assigned a point value. Surveys are not graded.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Test Manager
Explains how to create and manage Tests.
How to Create or
Modify a Test
Describes the process for creating a Test.
Test Info
Explains the data used to describe a test.
Test Canvas
Describes the area used to add questions and organize a Test.
Test Creation
Settings
Explains the options used to control the availability of Test features.
Question
Completion Status
Describes how the question completion status feature informs
users of which questions they have answered.
Multiple Choice
Questions
Reviews how to add or modify questions.
True/False
Questions
Describes True/False questions.
Fill in the Blank
Questions
Describes Fill in the Blank questions.
Multiple Answer
Questions
Describes Multiple Answer questions.
Matching Questions
Describes Matching questions.
Ordering Questions
Describes Ordering questions.
Essay Questions
Describes Essay questions.
Calculated
Questions
Describes Calculated questions.
Numeric Response
Describes Numeric Response questions.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 223 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Questions
File Response
Questions
Describes File Response questions.
Hot Spot Questions
Describes Hot Spot questions.
Multiple Fill in the
Blank Questions
Describes Multiple Fill in the Blank questions.
Jumbled Sentence
Questions
Describes Jumbled Sentence questions.
Opinion Scale
Questions
Describes Opinion Scale questions.
Short Response
Questions
Describes Short Response questions.
Either/Or Questions
Describes Either/Or questions.
Quiz Bowl
Questions
Describes Quiz Bowl questions.
Add/Modify
Random Block
Explains how to add a random set of questions to a Test.
Upload Questions
Describes the process and file format for uploading questions to a
Test.
Search Pool and
Assessments
Reviews the search function for finding questions.
Categorize
Question
Details how to organize questions into groups.
Category Manager
Describes the feature used to control categories.
Survey Manager
Explains how to create and manage Surveys.
Pool Manager
Describes how to create and manage Pools of questions.
Pool Import
Explains how to import a pool of questions
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 224 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
TEST MANAGER
Overview
The Test Manager is used to create, modify, and remove Tests.
NOTE: Surveys include many of the same features and functions as Tests.
Differences between the two are noted throughout this section. Surveys
are managed through the Survey Manager, which functions like the Test
Manager.
Find this page
Click Test Manager in the Assessment area on the Control Panel to open the Test Manager.
Functions
The functions available on this page are described in the table below.
To . . .
click. . .
create a Test
Add Test. The Test Info page will appear.
modify a Test
Modify next to the Test. The Test Canvas page will appear.
remove a Test
Remove next to the Test. A confirmation box appears.
Removing a Test is irreversible.
Questions to consider before creating an Assessment
Below are questions to consider when planning an Assessment:
•
How many questions?
•
Are there instructions for this Assessment?
•
What type of questions?
•
What is the point value associated with each question?
Warning
A warning will appear if any Students are in the process of taking the Test or have already taken
the Test when Modify is selected. Certain areas of the Test will not be available for modification if
the Test has already been taken by Students.
If the Instructor modifies an Assessment after a Student has submitted it, the Student will view the
new, modified Assessment when they view their grade and feedback. They will not view their
original Assessment attempt.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 225 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
HOW TO CREATE OR MODIFY A TEST
Overview
This topic describes how to create a Test.
Find this page
Click Test Manager in the Assessments area on the Control Panel to open the Test Manager.
How to create a Test
Follow the steps below to create a Test.
1.
Select Add Test on the Test Manager page.
2.
Enter a name, description, instructions and click Submit.
3.
Select a question type on the Test Canvas and click Go.
4.
Create a question.
5.
Enter the Point Value for the question.
6.
Attach a file or URL.
7.
Enter answers to choose from and select the correct answer.
8.
Enter feedback that Students will see based on their answer.
9.
Repeat Step 3 through Step 8 until finished adding questions.
How to make a Test available
Follow the steps below to make a Test available.
1.
Open a course area and select Add Test.
2.
Select the Test to add and click Submit.
3.
Select the Properties, Availability, Feedback, and Presentation options for the Test.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 226 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
TEST INFO
Overview
On the Test Info page the Instructor begins creating a test by selecting a name, description, and
instructions.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Test Info page.
1.
Select Test Manager in the area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Test.
1.
Select Test Manager in the area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Modify next to an existing Test.
3.
Click Modify in the first section on the Test Canvas.
OR
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Test Info page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Test Info
Name [r]
Enter the name of the Test.
If the Test name is changed after it is created the name of the
test in the Gradebook will not be changed. To change the
name of the Test in the Gradebook as well, edit the Item
Information in the Gradebook.
Description
Enter a description of the Test.
Instructions
Enter instructions for the users taking the Test.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 227 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
TEST CANVAS
Overview
The Test Canvas page is the center of the Test creation process. Instructors can modify the Test
name and instructions, add and modify questions on the Test, and view Tests. With the exception
of minor text changes, such as correcting a typo, Assessments should not be modified if Students
have already begun taking the Assessment.
Find this page
Follow these steps to open the Test Canvas page for an existing test.
1.
Select Test Manager in the Assessment area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Modify next to an existing Test.
Follow these steps to open the Test Canvas page for a new test.
1.
Select Test Manager in the Assessment area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Test.
3.
Complete the Add Test page and select Submit.
Functions
The functions available on the Test Canvas page are described in the table below.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
add a question
the drop-down menu in the Add Question: field, select a type of
question to add and click Go.
add a question in
between
existing
questions
the drop-down menu in the Add Question: field, select a type of
question to add and click Add Question Here in the location where
the question should appear.
change the settings
for this Test
Creation Settings. The Test Creation Settings page will appear.
Creation Settings enable the Instructor to adjust the default point
value, options for question feedback and the inclusion of images.
change the name,
description,
or
instructions for the
Test
Modify to the right of the Name, Description, and Instructions.
change the order of
the questions
the drop-down list to the left of the question header. Select a new
order for the questions using the numbers in the drop-down list.
Modify to the right of the question header.
modify a question
remove a question
Remove to the right of the question header. A confirmation box will
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 228 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
appear. Removing a question is irreversible.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 229 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
TEST CREATION SETTINGS
Overview
The Test Creation Settings page allows Instructors to adjust settings for a Test. These settings
control options, such as question feedback, categorization of questions, and default point value.
NOTE: The Pool Creation Settings page and Survey Creation Settings
page function in the same way as the Test Creation Settings. The
differences are the Specify default point values for questions option is not
available on the Pool Creation Settings page or the Survey Creation Page.
Also, the Add Categories to questions option is not available on the Survey
Creation Settings page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Test Creation Settings page.
1.
Select Test Manager in the Assessment area of the Control Panel.
2.
Click Add Test.
3.
Complete the Add Test page and select Submit.
4.
Select Creation Settings.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Creation Settings
Provide feedback
for individual
answers
Select this check box to include the option to enter feedback for
individual answers rather then just one set of feedback for correct
or incorrect answers.
Individual feedback cannot be provided for answers in True/False
questions, Multiple Answer questions, Ordering and Matching
questions.
Add images, files,
and URLs to
questions
Select this check box to include the option to attach images, files,
and URLs to questions.
Add images and
files to answers
Select this check box to include the option to attach images and
files to answers.
Add categories
and keywords to
questions
Select this check box to include the option to create categories for
questions. This option also enables Instructors to add keywords to
questions. When searching for questions from a Question Pool or
other Tests, Instructors may search for questions by category and
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 230 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
keyword.
Specify default
point value for
questions
Select this option and all questions will automatically have the
same point value. Enter the point value in the Default point value:
field. This only sets a default.
Default Point Value
Instructors must set the Default Point Value before creating questions for it to be effective. If the
default point value is changed, only questions created after it is modified will have the new point
value. Questions created before the modification will have the old point value. For example, set the
Default Point Value to ten then create questions in the Assessment. These questions will have a
point value of ten. Next, change the Default Point Value to 15, and create additional questions in
the Assessment. These new questions will have a point value of 15, but the questions created
initially will still have a point value of ten.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 231 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
QUESTION COMPLETION STATUS
About Question Completion Status
The Questions Status Indicator is a tool to provide users with a quick up-to-date look at their
progress (complete or incomplete questions) in an assessment at all times. The Save button next
to each question provides a visual reminder to Students to save their work periodically.
Completion status of assessment questions is displayed at the top of the page when a student is
taking an assessment. The status of which questions have been answered is displayed at the top
of the page, just below the Name and Instructions box.
When the user answers a question and moves on to the next question in a question-by-question
assessment, the status box will be updated on the next page to show that the previous question
was answered. If the user does not answer a question and moves on to the next page in a question
by question assessment, the status box will show on the next page that the previous question was
not answered. The user can navigate between questions by clicking on the question number in the
status indicator. This is applicable only to assessments deployed all at once or question by
question where backtracking is permitted.
While taking an all-at-once assessment, the user will be able to use a Save button to the right of
each question to save this specific question without scrolling to the bottom of the page to save.
Saving either a single question or all of the questions that have been answered (with the Save
button at the bottom of the page) changes the status indicator to show which questions have been
completed.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 232 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
QUESTION METADATA
Overview
Instructors have the option to create categories, keywords, Learning Objectives, and Levels of
Difficulty for questions to help organize them for future use.
NOTE: The Question Metadata options are only available if Add categories
and keywords to questions is selected in Creation Settings.
Add Metadata to a Question
Follow these steps to add metadata to a question.
1.
Select Test Manager in the Assessment area of the Control Panel.
2.
Create a new Test or select Modify next to an existing Test.
3.
Select a new question in the Add Question: field or select Modify next to an existing
question.
4.
Click Categorize to add a category, Set Learning Objective to add a Learning Objective,
or Set Level of Difficulty to add a Level of Difficulty. For Keywords, enter the words,
separated by commas, directly into the Keywords field.
5.
Select a value from the drop-down list and click Add. The metadata will be assigned to the
question. To organize the list of available values, click Manage.
Manage Metadata
Metadata values can be added, removed, and changed. Metadata created in one question can be
used when creating other questions in the same course. Follow these steps to add values for
metadata.
1.
Select Test Manager in the Assessment area of the Control Panel.
2.
Create a new Test or select Modify next to an existing Test.
3.
Select a new question in the Add Question: field or select Modify next to an existing
question.
4.
Click Manage Categories, Set Learning Objective, or Set Level of Difficulty.
5.
To add a value to the list of available values, enter it in the field and click Add. Available
values appear below. Click Modify to change the name of a value or Remove to delete
the value from the list.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 233 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
Overview
Multiple-choice questions allow the users a multitude of choices with only one correct answer. In
multiple-choice questions, users indicate the correct answer by selecting a radio button. The
number of answer choices is limited to 20.
Find this page
Click Add or Modify a question from the Test Canvas.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page. Some of these fields may not be available based on
the options chosen on the Test Creation Settings page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Multiple Choice Question
Question text [r]
Enter the question.
Point Value [r]
Enter the point value for this question.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the question.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list:
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the question.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Answers
Number
Answers
Answer
of
Select the number of possible answers to this question from the
drop-down list.
Enter answers to the question. Select the Correct option next to
the correct answer to the question.
Click Remove and the answer will be removed. This action is
irreversible.
File
Use Browse to select a file to attach to this answer.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list:
Create a link to the file
Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the answer.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear on the Test.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 234 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Feedback
Enter feedback that Students will view for this answer.
File
Use Browse to select a file to attach to this feedback.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list:
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the feedback.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Feedback
Correct Response
Enter a response that will appear if the Student answers the
question correctly.
File
Use Browse to select a file to attach to this response.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list:
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the response.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear on the Test.
Incorrect
Response
Enter a response that will appear if the Student answers the
question incorrectly.
File
Use Browse to select a file to attach to this response.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list:
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the response.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Categories
Categorize
Click Categorize and the Categorize Question page will appear,
enabling the Instructor to associate the question with an existing
category or to create a new category. Categories are only available
if the Add categories to questions option is selected on the Test
Creation Settings page.
Keywords
Enter keywords for this question. Questions may be searched by
keyword.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 235 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
TRUE/FALSE QUESTIONS
Overview
True/False questions allow the user to choose either true or false. True and False answer options
are limited to the words True and False.
Find this page
Click Add or Modify a question from the Test Canvas.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page. Some of these fields may not be available based on
the options chosen on the Test Creation Settings page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
True/False Question
Question text [r]
Enter the question.
Point Value [r]
Enter the point value for this question.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the question.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the question.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Answers
Answer
Select True if the statement in the Question Text field is correct.
Select False if the statement in the Question Text field is incorrect.
Correct Response
Enter a response that will appear if the Student answers the
question correctly.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the response.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
Correct
Values
Feedback
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the response.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Incorrect
Enter a response that will appear if the Student answers the
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 236 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Response
question incorrectly.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the response.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the response.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Categories
Categorize
Click Categorize and the Categorize Question page will appear,
enabling the Instructor to associate the question with an existing
category or to create a new category. Categories are only available
if the Add categories to questions option is selected on the Test
Creation Settings page.
Keywords
Enter keywords for this question. Questions may be searched by
keyword.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 237 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
Overview
Multiple-choice questions allow the users a multitude of choices with only one correct answer. In
multiple-choice questions, users indicate the correct answer by selecting a radio button. The
number of answer choices is limited to 20.
Find this page
Click Add or Modify a question from the Test Canvas.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page. Some of these fields may not be available based on
the options chosen on the Test Creation Settings page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Multiple Choice Question
Question text [r]
Enter the question.
Point Value [r]
Enter the point value for this question.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the question.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list:
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the question.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Answers
Number
Answers
Answer
of
Select the number of possible answers to this question from the
drop-down list.
Enter answers to the question. Select the Correct option next to
the correct answer to the question.
Click Remove and the answer will be removed. This action is
irreversible.
File
Use Browse to select a file to attach to this answer.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list:
Create a link to the file
Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the answer.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear on the Test.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 238 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Feedback
Enter feedback that Students will view for this answer.
File
Use Browse to select a file to attach to this feedback.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list:
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the feedback.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Feedback
Correct Response
Enter a response that will appear if the Student answers the
question correctly.
File
Use Browse to select a file to attach to this response.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list:
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the response.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear on the Test.
Incorrect
Response
Enter a response that will appear if the Student answers the
question incorrectly.
File
Use Browse to select a file to attach to this response.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list:
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the response.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Categories
Categorize
Click Categorize and the Categorize Question page will appear,
enabling the Instructor to associate the question with an existing
category or to create a new category. Categories are only available
if the Add categories to questions option is selected on the Test
Creation Settings page.
Keywords
Enter keywords for this question. Questions may be searched by
keyword.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 239 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
FILL IN THE BLANK QUESTIONS
Overview
Fill in the Blank answers are evaluated based on an exact text match. Accordingly, it is important to
keep the answers simple and limited to as few words as possible. Answers are not case sensitive,
but are evaluated based on spelling. Consider the following tips when creating Fill in the Blank
questions and answers:
•
Provide answers that allow for common spelling errors.
•
Provide answers that allow for abbreviations or partial answers.
•
Create the question that indicates to Students the best way to answer the question.
Keep answers limited to one or two words to avoid mismatched answers due to extra spaces or
order of answer terms. For example if the question is Ben’s favorite colors are _____ and the
correct answer is Ben’s favorite colors are red and blue but the Student types blue, red, the answer
will be marked incorrect.
Find this page
Click Add or Modify a question from the Test Canvas.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page. Some of these fields may not be available based on
the options chosen on the Test Creation Settings page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Fill in the Blank Question
Question text [r]
Enter the question, as it is to appear on the Test.
Point Value [r]
Enter the point value for this question.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the question.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the question.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Answers
Number
Answers
Answer 1
of
Select the number of correct answers that will be accepted for this
question. This number will determine the number of Answer fields
that appear on the page. The maximum number of answers is 20.
Enter a correct answer to the question. Click Remove to remove
the answer. The number of answers will automatically be updated if
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 240 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
an answer is removed.
Feedback
Enter feedback that Students will view for the correct answer to the
question.
File
Use Browse to select a file to attach to this feedback.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the feedback.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Feedback
Correct Response
Enter a response that will appear if the Student answers the
question correctly.
File
Use Browse to select a file to attach to this response.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the response.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Incorrect
Response
Enter a response that will appear if the Student answers the
question incorrectly.
File
Use Browse to select a file to attach to this response.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the response.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Categories
Categorize
Click Categorize and the Categorize Question page will appear,
enabling the Instructor to associate the question with an existing
category or to create a new category. Categories are only available
if the Add categories to questions option is selected on the Test
Creation Settings page.
Keywords
Enter keywords for this question. Questions may be searched by
keyword.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 241 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MULTIPLE ANSWER QUESTIONS
Overview
Multiple answer questions allow users to choose more than one answer. Partial credit is not given
for partially correct answers, but Instructors may manually change the number of points a Student
receives on the Grade Assessment page.
Find this page
Click Add or Modify a question from the Test Canvas.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page. Some of these fields may not be available based on
the options chosen on the Test Creation Settings page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Multiple Answer Question
Question text [r]
Enter the question.
Point Value [r]
Enter the point value for this question.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the question.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the question.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Answers
Number
Answers
of
Select the number of correct answers that will be accepted for this
question. This number will determine the number of Answer fields
that appear on the page. The maximum number of answers is 20.
Answer
Enter an answer to the question. Select the Correct option if the
answer is correct. Click Remove to remove the answer. The
number of answers will automatically be updated if an answer is
removed.
File
Use Browse to select a file to attach to this answer.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the answer.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 242 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Feedback
Correct Response
Enter a response that will appear if the Student answers the
question correctly.
File
Use Browse to select a file to attach to this response.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the response.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Incorrect
Response
Enter a response that will appear if the Student answers the
question incorrectly.
File
Use Browse to select a file to attach to this response.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the response.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Categories
Categorize
Click Categorize and the Categorize Question page will appear,
enabling the Instructor to associate the question with an existing
category or to create a new category. Categories are only available
if the Add categories to questions option is selected on the Test
Creation Settings page.
Keywords
Enter keywords for this question. Questions may be searched by
keyword.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 243 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MATCHING QUESTIONS
Overview
Matching questions allow Students to pair items in one column to items in another column.
Instructors may include a different numbers of questions and answers in a Matching question.
Students will be granted partial credit for matching questions if they answer part of the question
correctly. For example, if the question is worth eight points and the student gives the correct
answers for half of the matches, they will receive four points.
Find this page
Click Add or Modify a question from the Test Canvas.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page. Some of these fields may not be available based on
the options chosen on the Test Creation Settings page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Matching Question
Question text [r]
Enter the question.
Point Value [r]
Enter the point value for this question.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the question.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the question
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Question Items
Number
Questions
of
Select the number of questions. This number will determine the
number of Question fields that appear on the page. The maximum
number is 20.
Question Text
Enter a question in each of the Question fields. Click Remove to
remove a question. The number of questions will automatically be
updated if an answer is removed.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the question.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 244 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
URL
Enter a URL to include with the question.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Answer Items
Number
Answers
of
Select the number of answers. This number will determine the
number of Answer fields that appear on the page. The maximum
number of answers is 20.
Answer Text
Enter an answer in each of the Answer fields. Click Remove to
remove an answer. The number of answers will automatically be
updated if an answer is removed.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the answer.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the answer.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Submit Information
Cancel
Select this option to return to cancel this question and return to the
Test Canvas.
Continue
Select this option to finish creating the Matching Question.
Assign
Match
Question
Items and Answer
Items
Select the corresponding letter value from the Answer Items
column next to each number in the Question Items column.
Feedback
Correct Response
Enter a response that will appear if the Student answers the
question correctly.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the response.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the response.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Incorrect
Response
Enter a response that will appear if the Student answers the
question incorrectly.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the response.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 245 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the response.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Categories
Categorize
Click Categorize and the Categorize Question page will appear,
enabling the Instructor to associate the question with an existing
category or to create a new category. Categories are only available
if the Add categories to questions option is selected on the Test
Creation Settings page.
Keywords
Enter keywords for this question. Questions may be searched by
keyword.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 246 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ORDERING QUESTIONS
Overview
Ordering questions require Students to provide an answer by selecting the correct order of a series
of items.
Students will be granted partial credit for ordering questions if they answer part of the question
correctly. For example, if the question is worth eight points and the student gives the correct order
for half of the items, they will receive four points.
Find this page
Click Add or Modify a question from the Test Canvas.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page. Some of these fields may not be available based on
the options chosen on the Test Creation Settings page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Ordering Question
Question text [r]
Enter the question.
Point Value [r]
Enter the point value for this question.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the question.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the question.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Answers
Number
Answers
of
Enter the number of answers to choose from. The maximum
number of answers is 20.
Correct Order
Enter the answers in the correct order. Click Remove to remove an
answer. The number of Answers will automatically be updated if an
answer is removed.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the question.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the question.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 247 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Submit Information
Cancel
Select this option to cancel this question and return to the Test
Canvas.
Continue
Select this option to finish creating the Matching Question.
Answers
Display Order
Select the order for the answers are to appear on the Test.
Correct Order
Displays the correct order for the answers.
Feedback
Correct Response
Enter a response that will appear if the Student answers the
question correctly.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the response.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the response.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Incorrect
Response
Enter a response that will appear if the Student answers the
question incorrectly.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the response.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the response.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Categories
Categorize
Click Categorize and the Categorize Question page will appear,
enabling the Instructor to associate the question with an existing
category or to create a new category. Categories are only available
if the Add categories to questions option is selected on the Test
Creation Settings page.
Keywords
Enter keywords for this question. Questions may be searched by
keyword.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 248 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ESSAY QUESTIONS
Overview
Essay questions require the Instructor to provide Students with a question or statement. Students
are given the opportunity to type an answer into a text field. Sample answers can be added for
users or graders to use as a reference. These types of questions must be graded manually on the
Grade Assessment page. Essay questions may use the Math and Science Notation Tool.
Find this page
Click Add or Modify a question from the Test Canvas.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Essay Question
Question
text [r]
Enter the question.
Point Value
[r]
Enter the point value for this question.
File
Click Browse to select a file to attach to the question.
Action
Select an action for the attached file in the drop-down list
• Create a link to the file
• Display the media file within the page
URL
Enter a URL to include with the question.
Title
Enter a title for the URL as it should appear in the question.
Answer
Answer
Enter an example of an answer. Students will be able to view this sample.
Categories
Categorize
Keywords
Click Categorize and the Categorize Question page will appear, enabling the
Instructor to associate the question with an existing category or to create a
new category. Categories are only available if the Add categories to questions
option is selected on the Test Creation Settings page.
Enter keywords for this question. Questions may be searched by keyword.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 249 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
CALCULATED FORMULA QUESTIONS
About Calculated Formula Questions
A Calculated Formula question contains a formula, the variables of which can be set to change for
each user. The variable range is created by specifying a minimum value and a maximum value for
each variable. Answer sets are randomly generated. The correct answer can be a specific value or
a range of values. Partial credit may be granted for answers falling in a range.
Adding a calculated question to an Assessment is a three step process:
•
Create the question and formula.
•
Define the values for the variables.
•
Confirm the variables and answers.
Create the Question and Formula
The question is the information presented to students. The formula is the mathematical expression
used to find the answer. Be sure to enclose variables in square brackets.
Follow these steps to create the question and formula:
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Calculated Formula from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the information that will display to Students in the Question Text box. Surround any
variables with square brackets, for example, [x]. The value for this variable will be
populated based on the formula. In the example [x] + [y] = z, [x] and [y] will be replaced
by values when shown to Students. Students would be asked to define z.
Variables should be composed of alphabets, digits (0-9), periods (.), underscores (_) and
hyphens (-). All other occurrences of the opening rectangular brace ("[") character should
be preceded by the back-slash ("\") character. Variable names must be unique and cannot
be reused.
4.
Define the formula used to answer the question in the Formula box. For example, x + y.
Operations are chosen from the buttons across the top of the Formula box.
5.
Assign a point value for the question. Several other options may appear based on the
Creation Settings.
6.
Set the Answer Range. This defines which submitted answers will be marked correct. If
the exact value must be entered, enter 0 and select Numeric from the drop-down list. If
the answer can vary, enter a value and select Numeric or Percent. Numeric will mark
every answer as correct that falls within a range of plus or minus the Answer Range from
the exact answer. Percent will mark every answer as correct that falls within a percentage
of plus or minus the Answer Range from the exact answer.
7.
Select Yes or No for Units Required. If Yes, correct answers must include the correct
unit of measurement, for example, Seconds or Grams. Enter the correct unit of
measurement and choose if the unit of measurement is case sensitive. The answer may
still receive partial credit if the unit of measurement is not correct. Enter a percentage in
Unit Points Percentage. The unit of measurement will account for that percentage of the
total credit.
8.
Define partial credit for answers that fall outside the correct Answer Range. Select Yes or
No for Allow Partial Credit. Enter a value for the Partial Credit Points Percentage.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 250 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Now, set the range for partial credit by entering a value and selecting Numeric or Percent
for the Partial Credit Range. Answers falling within this range will receive a portion of the
total points possible for the question equal to the Partial Credit Points Percentage.
9.
When finished with the question, click Continue to proceed.
Define the Variables
The next page in the three step process defines the variables in the formula. Follow these steps to
define the variables.
1.
For each variable, set a minimum and a maximum value.
2.
For each variable, select a decimal place using the drop-down list that appears in the
Decimal Places column.
3.
Under Answer Set Options, select the Decimal places for answer from the drop-down
list. Users must provide the correct answer to this decimal place.
4.
Enter the number of different Answer Sets. The Answer Sets will be randomized so that
different Students will be presented with a different set of variables.
5.
Click Continue to proceed. Or, Click Back to return to the previous page or click Calculate
to reset the variables after making a change.
Confirm the Variables and Answers
The last step in the process displays the Answer Sets in a table. For each set, each variable and
the answer are displayed. Make any changes or remove any unwanted answer sets and click
Calculate.
Below the Answer Sets are the standard options for adding feedback and metadata to questions.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 251 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
CALCULATED NUMERIC RESPONSE QUESTIONS
About Calculated Numeric Response Questions
This question resembles a fill-in-the-blank question. The user enters a number to complete a
statement. The correct answer can be a specific number or within a range of numbers.
Create a Calculated Numeric Response Question
Follow these steps to create a Numeric Response question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Numeric from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value. Complete any advanced features for the question as defined by the
Creation Settings of the assessment.
5.
Enter the Correct Answer. This value must be a number.
6.
Enter the Answer Range. If the answer must be exact for Students to receive credit, enter
0. Any value that is less than or more than the Correct Answer by less than the Answer
Range value will be marked as correct.
7.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign the question metadata.
8.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 252 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
FILE RESPONSE QUESTIONS
About File Response Questions
Users upload a file from the local drive or from the Blackboard Content System™ as the answer to
the question. This type of question is graded manually.
Create a File Response Question
Follow these steps to create a File Response question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select File Response from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value. Complete any advanced features for the question as defined by the
Creation Settings of the assessment.
5.
Assign the question any metadata.
6.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 253 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
HOT SPOT QUESTIONS
About Hot Spot Questions
Users indicate the answer by marking a specific point on an image. A range of pixel coordinates is
used to define the correct answer. Hot Spot refers to the area of an image that, when selected,
yields a correct answer.
Create a Hot Spot Question
Follow these steps to create a Hot Spot question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Hot Spot from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value. Complete any advanced features for the question as defined by the
Creation Settings of the assessment.
5.
Enter the path to the file in the Attach Local File field under the Upload Image heading.
Make sure to upload the image in the correct field. Remember that Creation Settings
allows uploading a file as part of the Question Text.
6.
Click Next. The uploaded image will appear.
7.
Click the mouse and drag it to create a rectangle over the correct answer. When Students
select a point within the rectangle they will receive credit for a correct answer. The area of
the hot spot is defined by pixels. Click Clear to remove the hot spot and select a new hot
spot.
8.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign the question a category or other metadata.
9.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 254 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
FILL IN MULTIPLE BLANKS QUESTIONS
About Fill In Multiple Blanks Questions
This question type builds on fill-in-the-blank questions with multiple fill in the blank responses that
can be inserted into a sentence or paragraph. Separate sets of answers are defined for each blank.
Create a Multiple Fill-in-the-Blanks Question
Follow these steps to create a Fill In Multiple Blanks question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Fill In Multiple Blanks from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text. Enter each blank as a variable surrounded by square brackets.
For
example,
William
[blank_1]
wrote
Romeo
and
[blank_2].
Variables should be composed of alphabets, digits (0-9), periods (.), underscores (_) and
hyphens (-). All other occurrences of the opening rectangular brace ("[") character should
be preceded by the back-slash ("\") character. Variable names must be unique and cannot
be reused.
4.
Assign a Point Value. Complete any advanced features for the question as defined by the
Creation Settings of the assessment.
5.
Click Next.
6.
A list of variables found in the question will appear. Enter one or more correct answers for
each variable.
7.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign the question a category or other metadata.
8.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 255 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
JUMBLED SENTENCE QUESTIONS
About Jumbled Sentence Questions
Users are shown a sentence with a few parts of the sentence as variables. The user selects the
proper answer for each variable from drop-down lists to assemble the sentence. Only one set of
answers is used for all of the drop-down lists.
Create a Jumbled Sentence Question
Follow these steps to create a Jumbled Sentence question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Jumbled Sentence from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text. Enter each blank as a variable surrounded by square brackets.
Variables should be composed of alphabets, digits (0-9), periods (.), underscores (_) and
hyphens (-). All other occurrences of the opening rectangular brace ("[") character should
be preceded by the back-slash ("\") character. Variable names must be unique and cannot
be reused.
4.
Assign a Point Value.
5.
Select the Number of Answers and enter a value for each. These values will appear in a
drop-down list for each variable when users view the question. Enter the answers in the
order they should display to Students in the drop-down.
6.
Click Next.
7.
The question will appear with the drop-down lists in place of the variables. Select the
correct answers.
8.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign the question a category or other metadata.
9.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 256 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
OPINION SCALE/LIKERT QUESTIONS
About Opinion Scale/Likert Questions
Question type based on a rating scale designed to measure attitudes or reactions. Users indicate
the multiple choice answer that represents their attitude or reaction. When the instructor creates an
opinion scale question, six answer fields are pre-populated with the following answers:
•
Strongly Agree
•
Agree
•
Neither Agree nor Disagree
•
Disagree
•
Strongly Disagree
•
Not Applicable
Create an Opinion Scale/Likert Question
Follow these steps to create an Opinion Scale/Likert question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Opinion Scale from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value.
5.
Determine how the answers will be displayed by selecting Answer Numbering and
Answer Orientation.
6.
Check Allow Partial Credit and options will appear under each answer to assign a
percentage of points possible.
7.
The Answer fields are pre-populated with values on a Likert scale. Select a correct answer
and change any of the answer values.
8.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign question metadata.
9.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 257 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS
About Short Answer Questions
Short Answer questions are similar to essay questions. The length of the answer can be limited to a
specified number of rows in the text box.
The number of rows is meant as a guideline when entering an answer, it does not impose an
absolute limit on answer length.
Create a Short Answer Question
Follow these steps to create a short response question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Short Answer from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value.
5.
Select a number of rows for the answer.
6.
Enter an example of a correct answer to assist Graders.
7.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign question metadata.
8.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 258 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
EITHER/OR QUESTIONS
About Either/Or Questions
Users are presented with a statement and asked to respond using a selection of pre-defined twochoice answers, such as:
•
Yes/No
•
Agree/Disagree
•
Right/Wrong
Create an Either/Or Question
Follow these steps to create an Either/Or question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Either/Or from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value.
5.
Click the Correct Answer and select a positive value and a negative value from the dropdown lists.
6.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign the question metadata.
7.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 259 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
QUIZ BOWL QUESTIONS
About Quiz Bowl Questions
The user is shown the answer and responds by entering the correct question into a text box. An
answer must include a phrase and a question word, such as who, what, or where, to be marked as
correct. Partial credit may be given if the question word is not included in the answer.
Create a Quiz Bowl Question
Follow these steps to create a Quiz Bowl question.
1.
Open the Test Canvas for an assessment.
2.
Select Quiz Bowl from the question type drop-down list. Click Go.
3.
Enter the Question Text.
4.
Assign a Point Value.
5.
Click the Allow Partial Credit and enter a percentage of credit. This is the amount of
credit that will be given to answers that include the correct phrase but do not include the
correct interrogative word.
6.
Select the Number of Interrogative Words. Enter each acceptable interrogative word in
the fields below. One of these words must appear in the response for the Student to
receive full credit.
7.
Select the Number of Answer Phrases. Enter each acceptable phrase into the fields
below. One of these phrases must appear in the response for the Student to receive any
credit.
8.
Complete the question by adding optional feedback for correct and incorrect answers.
Assign question metadata.
9.
Click Submit to add the question to the assessment.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 260 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD/MODIFY RANDOM BLOCK
Overview
Random Blocks enable the Instructor to use a random selection of questions from a Pool. Be aware
that it is not possible to add a Random Block of questions from another Test or Survey.
NOTE: Random Blocks cannot be included in a Survey or a Pool.
Find this page
Click Add or Modify a question from the Test Canvas.
Fields
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Search
Search the pools
below:
Select a Pool from which to draw the group of questions.
Choose question
types to import
Select the check boxes next the question types to choose which to
include in the Random Block. If All is selected no other options can
be selected. If All is not selected one or more options may be
chosen.
Number
questions
import
Enter the number of questions to include in the Random Block.
Points
question
of
to
per
Enter the number of points each question in the Random Block will
be worth.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 261 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
UPLOAD QUESTIONS
Overview
Instructors may import files containing questions into an Assessment.
The questions in the uploaded file must match the file structure explained below. The file may
include Essay, Ordering, Matching, Fill in the Blank, Multiple Choice, Multiple Answer, and
True/False questions.
NOTE: Files with questions may be imported into Pools and Surveys. When
uploaded to a Survey, the correct/incorrect answer assignment is ignored,
but the file must follow the same format as described for Tests and Pools.
Please note that this feature is not available in Blackboard Learning System – Basic Edition.
The following information is important to note when importing Assessment questions:
•
Once uploaded, questions can be manipulated like other questions created within the
Assessment.
•
If there is an error in a question within a file, only the question with an error will fail to
upload. Questions without errors will upload successfully.
•
The system does not check for duplicate questions. It is up to the Instructor to manage
this aspect of the Assessment questions.
Find this page
Select Upload Questions from the Test Canvas.
Function
Click Browse and locate the file that is to be uploaded to this Assessment. All of the questions in
this file will be added to the Assessment.
Point Value
When questions are imported they automatically default to the point value set in Creation Settings.
If a default value has not been chosen in Creation Settings questions will automatically have a point
value of ‘0’ and Instructors must then enter a point value for each question.
File Structure
Questions in the file must conform to a specific structure to be uploaded to an Assessment
successfully. Each field in the file is separated by a tab. Each row is a separate question.
Multiple Choice questions are structured as follows:
‘MC’ TAB question text (TAB answer text TAB ‘correct’ or ‘incorrect’)
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 262 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the Multiple Choice
question. The maximum number of answers is 20.
Multiple Answer questions are structured as follows:
‘MA’ TAB question text (TAB answer text TAB ‘correct’ or ‘incorrect’)
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the Multiple Answer
question. The maximum number of answers is 20.
True/False questions are structured as follows:
‘TF’ TAB question text TAB ‘true’ or ‘false’
Essay questions are structured as follows:
‘ESS’ TAB question text TAB [example]
Text within [ ] is optional. The Instructor may choose to add a sample essay question or leave this
blank.
Ordering questions are structured as follows:
‘ORD’ TAB question text (TAB answer text)
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the Ordering question. The
maximum number of answers is 20.
The order entered in the file is the correct order. The system will randomly order the answers.
Matching questions are structured as follows:
‘MAT’ TAB question text (TAB answer text TAB matching text)
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the Matching question. The
maximum number of answers is 20.
The system will randomly order the answers and their question.
When uploading a matching question, there must be a one-to-one relationship between questions
and answers. If not, correct answers may be marked incorrect if more than one answer has the
same value.
Fill in the Blank questions are structured as follows:
‘FIB’ TAB question text (TAB answer text)
Text within () may be repeated for each of the answers that are part of the Fill in the Blank
question. The maximum number of answers is 20.
File Response questions are structured as follows:
'FIL' TAB question
Numeric Response questions are structured as follows:
'NUM' TAB question TAB answer TAB [optional]tolerance
Short Response questions are structured as follows:
'SR' TAB question TAB sample_answer
Opinion/Likert Scale questions are structured as follows:
OP TAB question
Multiple Fill-in-the-Blank questions are structured as follows:
FIB_PLUS TAB question TAB variable1 TAB answer1 TAB answer2 TAB variable2 TAB answer3
The format consists of a list of variable-answers where each variable- answer
is composed of the variable name and a list of correct answers for that
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 263 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
variable. variable-answers are delimited by an empty field.
Jumbled Sentence questions are structured as follows:
JUMBLED_SENTENCE TAB question TAB choice1 TAB variable1 TAB choice2 TAB TAB
choice3 TAB variable2
The format consists of a list of choices-answers where each choice-answer consists of the choice
followed by the list of variables for which that choice is the correct answer. An empty field indicates
the end of a choice answer. A choice immediately followed by an empty field indicates that that
choice is not the correct answer for any variable.
Quiz Bowl questions are structured as follows:
QUIZ_BOWL TAB question TAB question_word1 TAB question_word2 TAB phrase1 TAB
phrase2
The format consists of a list of valid question words followed by an empty field and a list of valid
answer phrases.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 264 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
SEARCH POOLS AND ASSESSMENTS
Overview
This section discusses how to select specific questions from Pools and other Assessments.
Instructors may choose questions based on category, keyword and question type.
Find this page
Click Search Pools and Assessments for a question from the Test Canvas page.
Field
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Search the pools
and assessments
below
Select a Test or question Pool from which to select the questions.
Question Types
Select All to choose questions from all question types or select one
or more question types.
Related
Categories
Select a category to choose questions from. This option is on the
Advanced tab.
Keywords
Enter keywords to search for questions. When entering more then
one keyword, insert a comma between keywords. If more than one
keyword is entered, only questions that have all of the keywords
will be retrieved. This option is on the Advanced tab.
Points
Once questions from a Pool are imported to a Test a point value must be assigned. If a default
point value has been set in Test Creation Settings the imported questions will automatically be set
to the default.
Choose Questions
Select one or more questions to include on the Test. Click Preview to view the question as it will
appear on the Test.
Instructors may select 20 questions at a time from a Pool or another Assessment to add to a Test.
When the search is performed 20 questions will appear on a page, if more the 20 questions are
found during the search, multiple pages may be viewed. Instructors may only select and submit
questions from one page at a time. For example, if the search returns three pages of questions,
the Instructor must select the questions to add on the first page and click Submit, then proceed to
the second page of the search, select questions on that page and select Submit, and so on until
finished.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 265 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Instructor Manual
Page 266 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
SURVEY MANAGER
Overview
Surveys provide Instructors with an Assessment tool that is useful for polling purposes, evaluations,
and random checks of knowledge. The Survey Manager is used to create, add, preview, modify,
and remove Surveys.
Find this page
To open the Survey Manager, click Survey Manager in the Assessment Area on the Control Panel.
Functions
The Survey Manager functions in the same way as the Test Manager and offers most of the same
options for creating and managing Surveys, Survey questions and settings.
Surveys differ from Tests in the following ways:
•
Questions on Surveys cannot be assigned points.
•
Surveys cannot include Random Blocks of questions.
•
Instructors cannot give Students feedback.
•
Surveys cannot be graded.
•
Survey questions cannot be categorized.
•
Questions may be imported into a Survey. Questions that are imported into a Survey may
not include correct and incorrect answers.
Survey Creation Settings
The Survey Creation Settings function in the same way as the Test Creation Settings. The only
difference is there are not options to Add categories to questions or to Specify default point
values for questions.
Survey Results
Instructors may view the results of Surveys on the Assessment Stats page. This page will show
how Students responded to questions on the Survey by percentage.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 267 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
POOL MANAGER
Overview
The Pool Manager allows Instructors to store questions for repeated use. Instructors can create
new questions to include in Pools and add questions that have been created in other Tests or
Pools. Pools from other courses can be imported through the Pool Manager. With the exception of
minor text changes, such as correcting a typo, a Pool should not be modified if Students have
already begun taking an Assessment that draws questions from the Pool.
NOTE: When creating question Pools for Surveys, Instructors must add correct
answers, as if they were creating Test questions. These answers will be ignored
once the question is copied into a Survey.
Find this page
Click Pool Manager in Assessments on the Control Panel to open the Pool Manager page.
Functions
The Pool Manager functions in the same way as the Test Manager and offers all of the same
options for creating and managing Pools. The difference between Pools and Tests is that Tests can
be added to Course areas for users to view and complete. Pools contain questions that can be
included in a Test. Pool questions cannot be presented to Students unless they are included in a
Test.
Pools also differ from Tests in the following ways:
•
Random Blocks cannot be added to Pools.
•
Pool questions do not have point values associated with them. When a Pool question is
added to a Test the Instructor can assign a point value.
•
A file of Pool questions may be imported from the Pool Manager page by selecting
Import.
•
A file of Pool questions may be exported from the Pool Manager page by selecting
Export. The exported Pool will be packaged in a .zip file. Once a pool is exported
questions may not be added to it.
Pool Creation Settings
The Pool Creation Settings function in the same way as the Test Creation Settings. The only
difference is there is not an option to Specify default point values for questions. Pool questions
are not associated with a point value until they are added to a Test.
Warning
When questions are selected from a Pool to be included in a Test links are created between the
Test and the Pool for those questions. Instructors should not make changes to Pool questions that
have been deployed in a Test once Students have begun taking the Test. A warning will appear if
any Students are in the process of taking the Test or have already taken the Test when Modify is
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 268 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
selected on the Pool Manager. Certain areas of the questions will not be available for modification if
the Test has already been taken by Students.
If the Instructor modifies a Pool question after a Student has submitted a Test it was included on,
the Student will view the new, modified question when they view their grade and feedback. They
will not view the original question.
Export Pool
A Question Pool may be exported by selecting Export on the Pool Manager page. The exported
Pool is packaged in a .ZIP file. Once a pool is exported, questions may not be added to it.
Instructors can choose to export a Question Pool to their local computer or to the Blackboard
Content System (if it is available). If the Blackboard Content System is not available, selecting to
Export a pool prompts the Instructor to store the pool on their local computer.
If Instructors select to export the pool to the Blackboard Content System, they
must enter a destination by either typing a valid path or by selecting Browse. If
Browse is selected, the Blackboard Content System will open in a new
window. Instructors may select any folder on which they have Write
permission. It is not possible to export a pool to an existing file; therefore, only
folders inside the Blackboard Content System can be selected. If an Instructor
manually enters a Blackboard Content System path without Write permission
on that path, an error message appears. In addition, if exporting a pool
exceeds the quota of the destination path, an error message appears and the
export does not occur.
NOTE: Blackboard Content System Destination paths that are manually entered
are case-sensitive.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 269 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
POOL IMPORT
Overview
Instructors may import a Pool of questions for use in Tests. Pools are exported from the
Blackboard Learning System and imported as .ZIP packages.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Pool Import page.
1.
Select Pool Manager in Assessments on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Import in the Action Bar.
Field
Instructors may import a pool from either their local computer or from the Blackboard Content
System, if it is available. Instructors may manually enter a path in either the Attach local file field
or in the Copy file from Content System field. Alternatively, Instructors may select the Browse
button next to a field to select the appropriate location of the package file. If the Instructor enters
both a local path and a Blackboard Content System path, an error message appears.
If the Instructor selects Browse next to Copy file from Content System, the
Blackboard Content System opens in a new window. Select the appropriate
package file, and click Submit. Folders cannot be selected, and only files on
which the Instructor has Read permission will be appear.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 270 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 13 – GRADEBOOK
Overview
Instructors record and manage all Student grades in the Gradebook.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Gradebook
Describes how the Gradebook manages all aspects of Student
grades.
Add/Modify
Gradebook Item
Provides instructions for creating and changing Gradebook items.
Manage Items
Details the options available for Gradebook Items.
Spreadsheet
Settings
Describes the options for viewing the Gradebook.
Manage Categories
Explains how to organize Gradebook Items into groups.
Create/Modify Item
Category
Provides instructions for creating and changing Gradebook Item
categories.
Manage
Options
Describes the settings for controlling what information is displayed
in the Gradebook.
Display
Create/Modify
Grade
Display
Options
Describes the settings for displaying individual grades.
Weigh Grades
Explains how Gradebook Items can be given more or less
importance when calculating the final grade.
Calculating
Total
and Weighted Total
in the Gradebook
Describes how grades are calculated and the options for displaying
final grades to users.
Download
Gradebook
Provides instructions for downloading the Gradebook.
Upload Gradebook
Provides instructions for uploading the Gradebook.
Choose Column to
Import: Items
Explains the option to import only certain Gradebook Items.
Choose Column to
Import: Students
Explains the option to import data about specific Students.
Modify
Grade:
Assessment
Explains how to change the grade of an Assessment.
Grade Assessment
Provides instructions for
Assessment questions.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
reviewing
and
manually
grading
Page 271 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Item Options: Tests
and Surveys
Reviews the Gradebook settings associated with Assessments.
View Item Grades
Provides instructions for viewing Student Grades for an item.
View Item Detail
Provides instructions for viewing detailed results.
Assessment Stats
Provides instructions
Assessment results.
Download
Assessment
Results
Provides instructions for downloading the results of an Assessment
for statistical analysis.
Modify
Grades:
Assignment
Explains how to change the grade for an Assignment.
Grade Assignment
Explains how to review and assign a grade to an Assigment
submission.
Item
Options:
Assignments
Describes the page that displays links for managing and grading
Assignments.
Download
Assignment
Provides instructions for downloading an Assignment submission.
Delete Assignment
Files
Provides instructions for deleting Assignment submissions.
User Options
Reviews the page that displays links with more information about a
user.
View
Information
User
for
viewing
detailed
statistics
about
Reviews the page that shows personal information about the user.
View User Grades
Reviews the page that shows all the grades for a user.
View User Detail
Reviews the page that shows performance statistics for an
individual user.
Gradebook Views
Explains the different Gradebook Views available to Instructors.
View Grades by
Gradebook Item
Details a Gradebook view that shows Gradebook Items. Grades
can be viewed for individual items.
View
User
Details a Gradebook view that shows users in a course. Grades
can be viewed for individual users.
Grades
Course Statistics
by
Explains how to generate reports on the course usage and activity.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 272 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
GRADEBOOK
Overview
The Gradebook posts all Student grades associated with Tests and Assignments. The Gradebook
also accommodates scores grades for work completed outside of the Blackboard Learning System.
Instructors may also view the results of Surveys through the Gradebook.
The Gradebook opens to the View Spreadsheet page. The Spreadsheet lists Students in rows and
graded items in columns. All features of the Gradebook can be accessed through the Spreadsheet.
Items in the Gradebook are categorized. This enables Instructors to:
•
sort and filter items by category. For example, Instructors may only want to view items in
the Exam category on the View Spreadsheet page.
•
weight categories differently. For example, items in a Homework category may be
weighted less than items in an Exam category.
NOTE: Assessments that are not available to Students do not appear in the
Gradebook.
Find this page
Click Gradebook in the Assessment area on the Control Panel to open the Gradebook.
Functions
The following functions are available from the View Spreadsheet page.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
add a Gradebook item
Add Item. The Modify Grade page will appear.
manage items
Manage Items. The Manage Items page will appear.
change
Spreadsheet
display and options
Gradebook Settings. The Gradebook Settings page will
appear.
manage grade weighting
Weight Grades. The Weight Grades page will appear.
download grades
Download Grades. The Download Gradebook page will
appear.
upload grades
Upload Grades. The Upload Gradebook page will appear.
modify a grade
the grade that needs to be modified. The View Grades page will
appear.
view and modify
details
for
Assessment
the
an
the Assessment Name. The Item Options page will appear.
view
the
the Assignment Name. The Item Options page will appear.
and
modify
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 273 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
TO . . .
CLICK
...
details for an Assignment
view statistics for a user
the user’s name. The User Options page will appear.
sort items
an option in the Sort Item by: drop-down list to sort the items by:
• Category
• Date Added
• Position
• Title
Click Go.
view a specific category
of Gradebook items
an option in the Filter Items by Category: drop-down list, then
click Go. Only items that match that type will appear in the
Spreadsheet View.
Gradebook legend
Every Student has a value for every Gradebook item. If the value is not a representation of the
grade, it will be one of the following symbols:
•
Padlock: In Progress. A Student is currently using the Assessment or Assignment.
•
Dash: No Information. A Student has not taken the Assessment or submitted the
Assignment.
•
Exclamation Point: Needs Grading. The item has been submitted by the Student and
needs to be reviewed by the Instructor. Tests that include Essay questions will have this
symbol when they are submitted.
•
Question Mark: Gradebook Error.
•
Checkmark: Item has been completed by the Student.
•
Asterisk: Item is not visible.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 274 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD/MODIFY GRADEBOOK ITEM
Overview
Gradebook Items may be added or modified from the Modify Gradebook Item page. Instructors
may add items and grades to the Gradebook for work that has been done outside the Blackboard
Learning System. For example, if Students manually hand in a project, the Instructor may add the
Item and all of the grades for the project to the Gradebook.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Modify Gradebook Item page.
1.
Select Gradebook in Assessments on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Add Item.
OR
3.
Select Gradebook in Assessments on the Control Panel.
4.
Select the name of a Gradebook Item.
5.
Click Item Information on the Item Options page.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Modify Gradebook Item page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Item Information
Item Name [r]
Enter a title for the new Gradebook item.
When editing an Assignment or Assessment created in the course,
be aware that changing the Item Name will only change the Item
Name in the Gradebook. It must also be changed in the course
area where the item appears if Students are to see the new name.
Category
Select a category, such as Homework or Quiz, from the drop-down
list.
Description
Enter a description of the Gradebook Item.
Date
Select a date for the Gradebook Item from the drop-down list or
click the Calendar icon and choose a date.
Points Possible
Enter the maximum number of points possible for this item.
Display As
Select how the grade should be displayed from the drop-down list.
Options
Make item visible
to Students
Select Yes to allow Students to view the item.
Include item in
Gradebook score
Select Yes and this item will be included in Gradebook
calculations. Select No and this item will not be included in
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 275 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
calculations
calculating the Total column.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 276 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MANAGE ITEMS
Overview
The Manage Items page allows the Instructor to modify Gradebook items and select the order for
them to appear in the Gradebook.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Manage Items page.
1.
Select Gradebook in Assessments on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Manage Items.
Functions
The following functions are available from the Manage Items page.
TO . . .
CLICK
set the order for
items to be listed
on
the
View
Spreadsheet page
the drop-down list next to each item name and select the order for
them to appear.
modify
the
Gradebook item
Modify. The Modify Gradebook Item page will appear.
remove
Gradebook item
Remove. A warning will appear. Removing a Gradebook item is
irreversible.
a
Add a Gradebook
item
...
Add Item. The Modify Gradebook Item page will appear.
Remove items
Items that have been uploaded to the Gradebook, or
removed from this page. Items that have been created
Surveys, and Assignments) must be removed from
example, a Test created in the Blackboard Learning
Manager.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
input directly into the Gradebook, may be
in the Blackboard Learning System (Tests,
the area where they were created. For
System, must be removed from the Test
Page 277 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
SPREADSHEET SETTINGS
Overview
Instructors use the Spreadsheet Settings page to adjust the Student information that displays in the
Gradebook.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Spreadsheet Settings page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Gradebook Settings.
3.
Click Spreadsheet Settings.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Spreadsheet Settings page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Options
Student
Name,
Last Name, First
Name
Select this check box to display the Student names with the last
names before the first names.
Student
Name,
First Name, Last
Name
Select this check box to display the Student names with the first
names before the last names.
User ID
Select this check box to display the Usernames on the
spreadsheet.
Student ID
Select this check box to display the Student IDs on the
spreadsheet.
NOTE: More then one check box may be selected. For example, the
Instructor may choose to include both the Student Name and the
Username on the spreadsheet. Hold Control to select more then one
option. Also, keep in mind that the filter on the Spreadsheet will continue to
filter by last name even if users’ last names are not displayed.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 278 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MANAGE CATEGORIES
Overview
The Manage Gradebook Categories page displays categories and category descriptions that are
included in the Gradebook. Instructors may create new Gradebook categories. Categories can be
used in weighting grades. For example, items in the Exam Category may have a greater weight
than items in the Assignment category.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Manage Categories page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Gradebook Settings.
3.
Click Manage Gradebook Categories.
Functions
The functions available on this page are described in the table below.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
add a category
Add Category. The Create/Modify Item Category page will appear.
On the Add Category page new categories can be entered.
modify a category
Modify. The Create/Modify Item Category page will appear. On the
Modify Category page the category name and description may be
changed.
remove a category
Remove. A warning will appear. Removing a category is
irreversible.
NOTE: Categories included with the Blackboard Learning System cannot
be modified or removed.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 279 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CREATE/MODIFY ITEM CATEGORY
Overview
The Instructors may create new Gradebook categories and make changes to existing categories
from the Manage Gradebook Categories page. Categories can be added to the Gradebook and
modified from the Create/Modify Category page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Create/Modify Item Category page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Gradebook Settings.
3.
Click Manage Gradebook Categories.
4.
Click Add Category.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Create/Modify Item Category page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Category Information
Title [r]
Enter the name of the Gradebook category.
Description
Enter a description of the Gradebook category.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 280 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MANAGE DISPLAY OPTIONS
Overview
Instructors may make changes to the display options from the Manage Display Options page.
Display Options define the scale for presenting grades.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Manage Display Options page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Gradebook Settings.
3.
Click Manage Display Options.
Functions
The table below details the available functions on the Manage Display Options page.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
add a grade display
option
Add Display Option. The Create/Modify Grade Display Option
page will appear. On the Add Grade Display Option page new
options may be created with a name, symbols, and values.
modify a grade
display option
Modify. The Create/Modify Grade Display Options page will
display all of the current information. On the Create/Modify Display
Option page the name, symbols, and options may be changed.
Score and Percentage display options cannot be modified.
copy
a
grade
display option
Copy. The Manage Display Options page will appear with all of the
information filled in. The copy may be modified by selecting
Modify. Score and Percentage display options cannot be copied.
remove a grade
display option
Remove. A warning pop-up window will appear. Removing a
category is irreversible. Display options included with the
Blackboard Learning System may not be removed and do not have
a Remove button associated with them.
Grade Display Options
The following Grade Display Options are included with the Blackboard Learning System:
Score – Score is the raw score earned by the Student. There is a limit of 6 digits. For example,
100.00 or 123456.
Percentage – Percentage is calculated by using the following calculation: (Raw Score/Points
Possible) *100
Letter – Letter is a letter grade that equals a specific range of Percentages. For example, 94% to
97% equals an “A” Letter grade. The following Letter grades are built into the Blackboard Learning
System. Instructors may modify these on the Modify Grade Display Options page.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 281 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
•
97% to 100% (or higher) = A+
•
94% to 97% = A
•
90% to 94% = A-
•
87% to 90% = B+
•
84% to 87% = B
•
80% to 84% = B-
•
77% to 80% = C+
•
74% to 77% = C
•
70% to 74% = C-
•
67% to 70% = D+
•
64% to 67% = D
•
60% to 64% = D-
•
59% or below = F
Instructor Manual
Text – Text allows the Instructor to enter any string as the score for a Gradebook item. It does not
have any calculable value. Scores that are entered as Text cannot be set to a numerical range. It is
not possible to copy this display option, or modify the possible values.
Complete / Incomplete – This option signifies that a Student has completed an item. It is the
default option for Surveys.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 282 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CREATE/MODIFY GRADE DISPLAY OPTIONS
Overview
Instructors can add and modify Grade Display Options in the Gradebook from the Create/Modify
Grade Display Options page. Instructors can select a range of numeric grades to be associated
with a letter grade, or create new Grade Displays, such as Pass/Fail. Grade Display Options are
case sensitive. An “A” and “a” will not represent the same thing in the Gradebook.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Create/Modify Grade Display Options page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Gradebook Settings.
3.
Click Manage Grade Display Options.
4.
Select Add Display Option.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Create/Modify Grade Display Options page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Name
Name [r]
Enter the name of the new Grade Display Option.
Add Symbols and Values
System-graded
items with a grade
of
Enter the numeric values of the range for each grade. The system
will automatically treat the numbers within each range the same.
Manually-graded
items entered as
Enter the symbol the Instructor will use to manually enter grades.
Each symbol will correspond to the range in the system-graded
items.
Will be calculated
as
Enter a single numeric value for each symbol in the Manuallygraded items column. The number in this row will be used in
Gradebook calculations, such as for the final grade and grade
weight.
Add
Click Add to add a row in the Add Symbols and Values section.
Remove
Click Remove to remove a row in the Add Symbols and Values
section.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 283 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
WEIGHT GRADES
Overview
Instructors can set a weight for each Gradebook item to determine a final grade. For example, a
final exam may be worth 25 percent of a Student's grade while a reading quiz may be worth only 10
percent. Instructors can adjust Gradebook weights according to category or item.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Weight Grades page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Weight Grades.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Weight Grades page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Weighting
Weight
Category
Weight by Item
by
Click Weight by Category to weight grades by the category. For
example, all Assignments will have the same weight and all
Quizzes will have the same weight. Enter the percentage to weight
each category in the boxes to the left.
Click Weight by Item to weight grades by name as they are
defined in the Gradebook. For example, the mid-term exam can be
weighted differently then the final exam. Enter the percentage to
weight each item in the boxes to the left.
Weighted Total
The following information is important when weighting grades:
•
Gradebook items that have not been completed by Students are still calculated in the
weight. Instructors may also exclude items from calculations on the Add/Modify
Gradebook Item page.
•
The percentages in the selected option (Weight by Category or Weight by Option) must
add up to 100 percent. An error message will appear if the percentages do not add up to
100 percent.
•
If an item has a weight of 0 percent, the item will not be calculated in the grade weight.
This will occur if a new Gradebook item is added and a percentage for the item is not
added to the Weight by Item column.
When Weight by Category is selected, the following information will apply:
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 284 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
•
Each item in a category is worth the same weight, regardless of total points. For example,
if quizzes are worth 25% as a category, a quiz worth 50 points will not be weighted more
then a quiz worth 15 points.
•
The weight for each item is calculated by taking the weight for the category and dividing
that by the number of items in the category.
•
The number of items in the category is counted as the number of items the Instructor has
created in that category. Therefore, if Quizzes have a 100% weight and a Student takes
an exam and gets a perfect score, his or her weighted total will be 100%. If the Instructor
adds a second quiz, the Students weighted total will drop to 50%, since the weight for
each item is divided by two. Since, the Student has not taken the second exam yet, their
score for it is zero.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 285 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CALCULATING TOTAL AND WEIGHTED TOTAL IN THE GRADEBOOK
About Totals
Current Gradebook calculations for Total and Weighted Total include item that have not been
scored. For example, picture a course where the grade is determined by two tests weighted
equally. Using the current Gradebook settings, a Student with a score of 90 percent on the first quiz
would have a weighted total of 45 percent. This shows that the student has accumulated a score of
at least 45 percent in the course.
A new option to ignore ungraded items, or nulls, when calculating the total and weighted total
appears in Application Pack 3. In the example above, the student's progress would be reported as
90 percent.
When nulls are ignored, the Total and Weighted Total columns in the Gradebook are renamed to
Running Total and Running Weighted Total.
Calculating the Total and the Weighted Total
The table below details how Student progress is calculated in the Gradebook. Running Total and
Running Weighted Total are calculated without including ungraded items (nulls).
C ALCULATED
I TEM
W EIGHT BY
D ISPLAY
O PTION
/
C ALCULATION
F ORMULA
Total
&
Running
Total
Points Possible
∑ (Item.PointsPossible)
Total
Score
∑ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven)
Running
Total
Score
Same as Total above
Total
Percentage
∑ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven)
/
∑ (Item.PointsPossible)
Running
Total
Percentage
∑ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven)
/
∑ (Item.PointsPossible
not including items where
Attempt.PointsGiven=NULL)
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 286 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
C ALCULATED
I TEM
W EIGHT BY
D ISPLAY
O PTION
/
C ALCULATION
F ORMULA
Weighted
Total
&
Running
Weighted
Total
Item
Points Possible
∑ (Item.PointsPossible *
Item.Weight)
Weighted
Total
&
Running
Weighted
Total
Category
Points Possible
∑ (Item.PointsPossible *
Category.Weight)
Weighted
Total
Item
Score
∑ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven *
Item.Weight)
Weighted
Total
Category
Score
∑ (Category1
Attempt.PointsGiven) *
Category1.Weight +
∑ (Category2
Attempt.PointsGiven) *
Category2.Weight +
∑ (Category3
Attempt.PointsGiven) *
Category3.Weight + …
Running
Weighted
Total
Item
Score
Same as Item Weighted Total
above
Running
Weighted
Total
Category
Score
Same as Category Weighted
Total above
Weighted
Total
Item
Percentage
∑ [ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven
/
Item.PointsPossible) *
Item.Weight]
/
∑ (Item.Weight)
Weighted
Total
Category
Percentage
∑ [ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven
/
Item.PointsPossible) *
(Category.Weight /
Category.Number-Of-Items) ]
/
∑ (Category.Weight)
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 287 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
C ALCULATED
I TEM
Running
Weighted
Total
W EIGHT BY
Item
D ISPLAY
O PTION
/
C ALCULATION
Percentage
F ORMULA
∑ [ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven
/
Item.PointsPossible) *
Item.Weight]
/
∑ (Item.Weight not including
items where
Attempt.PointsGiven=NULL)
Running
Weighted
Total
Category
Percentage
∑ [ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven
/
Item.PointsPossible) *
(Category.Weight /
Category.Number-Of-NonNULLItems) ]
/
∑ (Category.Weight not
including where ALL items
Attempt.PointsGiven=NULL)
The table shows that when calculated based on Points Possible ignoring ungraded items has no
effect.
TIP: The Running Total and Running Weighted Totals should use the Percentage
or Letter Grade display option when ignoring ungraded items. This will display
student performance only on completed items.
Set the Total or Weighted Total to Ignore Ungraded Items
The ability to include or ignore ungraded items is not available in all courses. The Administrator
must first turn on the feature. Existing courses will continue to include ungraded items until this
feature is enabled in the specific course. After confirming that the option is available, follow the
steps below to set the Gradebook to ignore ungraded items.
1.
Open the Gradebook.
2.
Click Total or Weighted Total. After setting one to ignore or include ungraded items, be
sure to set the other one.
3.
Click Item Information.
4.
Select Yes or No for Ignore Ungraded Attempts.
Example Calculation using Ignore Ungraded Items
The example below shows how ignoring ungraded items will affect the reported progress for one
user throughout a course. Keep in mind:
•
The final grade is made up of four quizzes, two tests, one paper, and one final exam.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 288 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
•
The final grade is determined by totaling the scores of all Gradebook items and weighting
them by type. Quizzes are worth a total of 20 percent. Tests are worth 20 percent. The
paper is worth 30 percent and the final is worth 30 percent.
•
The Gradebook is set to display scores as percentages.
•
In the tables below, grades are listed in chronological order and percentages are rounded
to the nearest whole number.
The table below shows the Total and Weighted Total displayed after each assignment is
completed. Ungraded items are included in the calculation. The formulas to generate the Total and
Weighted Total are:
•
Total: ∑ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven)
•
Weighted Total: ∑ [ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven /
Item.PointsPossible) * (Category.Weight / Category.Number-OfItems) ]
G RADEBOOK I TEM
/
/
∑ (Item.PointsPossible)
∑ (Category.Weight)
G RADE
T OTAL
W EIGHTED T OTAL
Quiz 1
85
10%
4%
Quiz 2
90
22%
9%
Test 1
88
33%
18%
Quiz 3
75
42%
21%
Quiz 4
80
52%
25%
Paper
90
63%
52%
Test 2
80
73%
60%
Final Exam
92
85%
88%
Final Grade
88%
The table below shows the Running Total and Running Weighted Total displayed after each
assignment is completed. Keep in mind that ungraded items are included in the calculation. The
formulas to generate the Total and Weighted Total are:
•
Running Total: ∑ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven) / ∑
(Item.PointsPossible not including null values)
•
Running Weighted Total: ∑ [ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven /
Item.PointsPossible) * (Category.Weight / Category.Number-OfNonNULL-Items) ] /
∑ (Category.Weight not including where ALL items
Attempt.PointsGiven=NULL)
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 289 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
G RADEBOOK I TEM
G RADE
R UNNING T OTAL
R UNNING
W EIGHTED T OTAL
Quiz 1
85
85%
85%
Quiz 2
90
88%
88%
Test 1
88
88%
88%
Quiz 3
75
84%
86%
Quiz 4
80
84%
85%
Paper
90
85%
87%
Test 2
80
84%
86%
Final Exam
92
85%
88%
Final Grade
88%
For some added insight into Gradebook calculations look at how the Running Weighted Total is
calculated after the Student received a grade on the Paper. Remember that the formula to calculate
the Running Weighted Total is:
∑ [ (Item.Attempt.PointsGiven / Item.PointsPossible) * (Category.Weight
/ Category.Number-Of-NonNULL-Items)] / ∑ (Category.Weight not including
where ALL items Attempt.PointsGiven=NULL)
Q1: [(85/100) * (.2/4)] = .0425
Q2: [(90/100) * (.2/4)] = .045
T1: [(88/100) * (.2/1)] = .176
Q3: [(75/100) * (.2/4)] = .0375
Q2: [(80/100) * (.2/4)] = .04
P : [(90/100) * (.3/1)] = .27
Sum
= .611
Running Total
= .611/.7 = .873
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 290 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
DOWNLOAD GRADEBOOK
Overview
Instructors can download and save a Gradebook as a comma-delimited file for use in a
spreadsheet program. This file, or Gradebook items in this file, can be uploaded to a Gradebook at
a later date.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Download Gradebook page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Download Grades.
Download Gradebook
Click Download and select where to save the Gradebook file. Downloading a Gradebook does not
remove any information from the Gradebook.
NOTE: The Total and Weighted Total columns are included in a Gradebook
download. However, these columns will not be included in a Gradebook
Upload, because they are generated by calculations within the Gradebook.
The Instructor cannot manipulate the data for these areas.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 291 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
UPLOAD GRADEBOOK
Overview
Instructors may upload Gradebook information into the Blackboard Learning System from the
Upload Gradebook page.
The Gradebook Upload will fail if the user name for each row of data is not present. Also, the
Gradebook will not process the data for any Username that is not enrolled as a user in the Learning
System course. Changes to the first name and last name columns will not be processed.
NOTE: For best results, Instructors should manipulate and upload a
Gradebook that has been downloaded from the Blackboard Learning
System (Release 6 or higher). It is not advised that Instructors create a
new Gradebook from scratch then upload it. Also, it is not possible to
upload a Gradebook from an earlier version of the Blackboard Learning
System, such as Blackboard 5.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Upload Gradebook page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Upload Gradebook.
Upload a Gradebook
Click Browse and select the file to upload to the Gradebook. The Choose Column to Import page
will appear. On this page the Instructor may specify which item he or she would like to upload to the
Gradebook. When a Gradebook is uploaded the existing grades are not automatically written over
or lost. In the following Web pages the Instructor chooses which information is uploaded and
written over.
Gradebooks may be uploaded as .csv files (using a spreadsheet) or as .txt (flat files). When
uploading as a .txt file, check to make sure that the file uses the following format:
"Last Name, First Name (User Name) | Student Id","item1","item2","test
4","survey","Total","Weighted Total"
Keep in mind that the values for total and weighted total will not be processed as part of the upload.
Only the scores for the individual Gradebook Items will be uploaded.
If the name of a column in the source does not match the name of a column in the destination, the
user will be notified. They may decide whether or not they would like to proceed with the operation.
NOTE: The Total and Weighted Total columns cannot be included in a
Gradebook upload because this data is generated by calculations within
the Gradebook. Instructors cannot manipulate the data for these areas.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 292 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHOOSE COLUMN TO IMPORT: ITEMS
Overview
Instructors select which items in a Gradebook file they would like to upload to the Blackboard
Learning System from the Choose Column to Import page. Instructors may choose to overwrite an
existing item (this will not automatically overwrite Students’ grades) or create a new Gradebook
item.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Choose Column to Import page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Upload Gradebook.
3.
Select a file to upload on the Upload Gradebook page and click Submit.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Choose Column to Import page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Choose Imported Item
Select the column in the file that should be uploaded to the Gradebook.
Choose Existing Item
Select the column in the Gradebook where the name of the uploaded Gradebook item
should appear. If the information should appear in a new column in the Gradebook select
Create New Gradebook Item. If Create New Gradebook Item is selected the Modify
Gradebook Item will appear.
Functions
If a Gradebook item in Choose Import Item is uploaded to an existing item, the only data that is
uploaded and changed is the Gradebook item name. The Instructor selects which Student’s grades
should be uploaded and written over on the Choose Column to Import: Students page.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 293 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHOOSE COLUMN TO IMPORT: STUDENTS
Overview
When uploading Gradebook information, Instructors select one or more items in a Gradebook file
they would like to upload from the first Choose Column to Import page. On the second Choose
Column to Import page Instructors choose which Student information is uploaded from the
Gradebook file. Only those Student’s grades that are selected on this page will be uploaded to the
destination file.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Choose Column to Import: Students page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click Upload Gradebook.
3.
Select a file to upload on the Upload Gradebook page and click Submit.
4.
Select which item in the file to upload and click Submit.
Functions
The table below details the available functions on the Choose Column to Import: Students page.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
upload information
from the file for one
or more Students
the checkboxes next to the Student’s names.
add information for
all of the Students
in the file to the
Gradebook
Select All. All of the check boxes next to the Student names will be
selected.
clear
the
checkboxes next to
all of the Student
names
Select None. All of the check boxes next to the Student names will
be removed.
select the opposite
Students
then
those
whose
checkboxes
are
selected.
Select Inverse. The checkboxes for those Students who had been
selected will be cleared and those Students who had not been
selected will be chosen.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 294 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MODIFY GRADE: ASSESSMENT
Overview
Instructors can modify a single Student grade on the Modify Grade page. On this page Instructors
can also add comments for the Student.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Modify Grades: Assessment page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a grade on the spreadsheet.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page.
TO…
THEN …
change the grade a
Student
received
on the Assessment
enter the new grade in the Grade field. There is a limit of 6 digits in
this field. For example, 100.00 or 123456.
view the details of
the
Assessment
submitted by the
Student
click View to open the Grade Assessment: Assessment Name
page. This page enables the Instructor to view the answers a
Student submitted for a Test and the correct answers. Instructors
can also change the number of points a Student is awarded for a
question.
clear a Grade
Clear Attempt. The Grade for the item will be reset.
Change Grade
Instructors may change the Student’s grade on this page in the Grade column. The points a
Student receives for a specific questions may be changed on the Grade Assessment: Assessment
Name page, which may be accessed by selecting View.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 295 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
GRADE ASSESSMENT
Overview
The Gradebook enables Instructors to manage all aspects of Student grades. The Grade
Assessment page enables the Instructor to view a Student’s answers to Assessment questions as
well as the correct answers. Instructors may also modify the number of points a Student is given for
their answer to a question.
NOTE: Instructors may read and grade Essay questions on this page
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Grade Assessment page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a grade on the spreadsheet. The My Grades page will appear.
3.
Click Grades.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page.
TO…
THEN …
clear the Student’s
submission
and
enable them to take
the
Assessment
again
click Clear Attempt. The Student will be able to re-take the
Assessment.
change the number
of points a Student
received
for
a
question
change the number of points in the field corresponding to the
question. Points received for an Essay question are input here.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 296 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ITEM OPTIONS: TESTS AND SURVEYS
Overview
The Item Options page enables Instructors to access areas where they can modify the Gradebook
item and view item statistics. These options enable the Instructor to:
•
view all Students’ grades for this Item
•
view details and statistics about the Gradebook item, such as, the class average and the
high and low score received
•
view and modify the Item, for example, make changes to the description or change the
availability of the Item
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Item Options page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Gradebook item.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page.
F UNCTION
D ESCRIPTION
Item Grade List
View a list of Students and their grades for this Assessment.
Item Detail
View the Assessment statistics, such as the average score and the
percentage of Student who answered questions correctly and
incorrectly.
Item Information
Modify the Gradebook item information, such as item name and
description.
Assessment
Attempt Details
View the statistics for how Students answered questions on an
Assessment.
Download Results
Download the results from tests and surveys.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 297 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
VIEW ITEM GRADES
Overview
Instructors may view a list of Student grades for a specific Gradebook item on the View Item
Grades page.
NOTE: When this page is accessed for a Survey the fields will contain a
check mark for those Students who have completed the Survey. Surveys
are not graded; therefore, individual grades will not appear on this page. If
a user has exceeded the time limit set for a survey, an exclamation point
will be displayed. The Instructor may enter a value in the Grade field. After
the value is entered, a check mark will be displayed in the Gradebook for
the survey.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the View Item Grades page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Gradebook item. The Item Options page will appear.
3.
Click Item Grade List.
Function
Instructors may change the grade a Student has received on the View Item Grades page. Enter the
new grade in the Grade column and click Submit.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 298 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
VIEW ITEM DETAIL
Overview
Instructors can view details for a Gradebook item on the My Grades page. These details include:
•
the number of possible points
•
the class average
•
the high score in the class
•
the low score in the class
•
the variance of how far scores diverge from the average
NOTE: This is an informational page. No data may be modified or deleted.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the View Item Detail page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Gradebook item. The Item Options page will appear.
3.
Click Item Detail.
Surveys
When this page is accessed for a Survey the fields will not contain any information. Surveys are not
graded and Survey questions do not have points.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 299 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ASSESSMENT STATS
Overview
The Assessment Stats page allows Instructors to view the statistics for a specific Assessment and
Assessment questions. Statistics include:
•
the average score Students receive on the Assessment
•
the average number of points a Student received for each question
•
the percentage of correct and incorrect answers on a question by question basis
NOTE: This is an informational page. No data may be modified or deleted
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Assessment Stats page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Gradebook item. The Item Options page will appear.
3.
Click Assessment Attempt Details.
Surveys
Instructors may view the results of surveys on this page. Results to individual Student attempts on
Surveys are not available.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 300 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
DOWNLOAD ASSESSMENT RESULTS
Overview
The results of Assessments may be downloaded for statistical analysis. Analysis is done through
another application, such as Microsoft Excel. Only the results of Multiple Choice and True/False
questions are included in a results download because these questions have a limited set of defined
answers. Other question types, such as essay or fill-in-blank, are not included.
The results download file is a comma-delimited (.CSV) file.
Download the results of an Assessment
Follow these steps to download results.
1.
Click on a Gradebook Item from the Gradebook spreadsheet view.
2.
Click Download Results from the Item Options page.
3.
Select to download the results By User or By Question and User.
4.
Click OK on the Download Results page.
5.
The file download box will appear. Select a location and a name for the file.
NOTE: If the Assessment has over 40 questions select the option By
Question and User. If the By User option is selected an error message
may appear.
NOTE: The Instructor may notice that one or more attempts are missing in
the download. This may occur because of a bad import, data corruption or
similar incident. When this occurs, a warning will appear in the
Administrator's log file stating "Gradebook grade entry found with no
matching attempt. Possible database corruption. "
Analyze the data
Consider the following points when analyzing results:
•
Each row represents an assessment attempt. If a user attempts an assessment twice,
only the most recent attempt will appear.
•
Questions and answers are reported in the order presented to the Student. If an
assessment includes random questions than each line in the results will report questions
in a different order (question 1 for one Student may be question 5 for another Student).
•
Survey results will not show user data for each attempt.
•
Results from a user with a course role of Instructor, Grader, or Teaching Assistant will not
be reported.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 301 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Instructor Manual
Page 302 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
MODIFY GRADES: ASSIGNMENT
Overview
When a Student submits an Assignment it will appear in the Gradebook, where Instructors can
access and grade it. Instructors can modify a single Student grade on the Modify Grades page,
make notes and add comments for the Student. Students access their grades and comments from
the Instructor through the Course Menu.
NOTE: Assignments are created by selecting Add Assignment in a Course area.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the View Grades: Assignment page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select an Assignment grade on the View Spreadsheet page.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page.
TO…
THEN …
enter or change the
grade the Student
received on the
Assignment
enter the new grade in the Grade field. There is a limit of 6 digits in
this field. For example, 100.00 or 123456.
view
the
Assignment
and
add comments
click View to open the Grade Assignment: Assignment Name page.
This page enables the Instructor to view the Assignment submitted
by the Student. Instructors may enter a grade, submit comments
for the Student, and upload files.
clear a Grade
Clear Attempt. The Grade for the item will be reset.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 303 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
GRADE ASSIGNMENT
Overview
When a Student submits an Assignment a link to their work will appear in the Gradebook, where
Instructors can review, respond, and grade it. Instructors can review the Student’s Assignment on
the Grade Assignment page. Students may only submit an Assignment once unless their attempt
has been cleared by the Instructor on the Grade Assignment page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Grade Assignment page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Click on the individual user’s score of the Assignment that needs to be graded.
3.
Click View on the Modify Grade page.
Field
The table below details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Assignment Information
Name
The name of the Assignment.
Instructions
The instructions for this Assignment.
Assignment
Files
Files uploaded by the Instructor when the Assignment was
created.
Clear Attempt
Click Clear Attempt to delete the Student’s Assignment. The
Student will be able to re-submit the Assignment once this option
is chosen.
Student’s Work
Student’s
Comments
Comments entered by the Student when the Assignment was
submitted.
Student’s Files
Files uploaded by the Student when the Assignment was
submitted.
Feedback to Students
Grade
Enter a grade for the Assignment.
Comments
Enter comments for the Student to view when they access the
grade for this Assignment.
Attach local file
Click Browse to select a file stored locally. Click Submit or Add
Another File to attach.
Copy file from
Click Browse and select a file to add as an attachment from the
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 304 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Content
Collection
Content Collection
Currently
Attached Files
Lists the files currently attached to the Instructor Comments. The
Student will be able to view these files when they access their
grade for the Assignment. If multiple files should be attached,
click Add Another File to add additional files.
Remove a file
Once a file has been added, a Remove button appears next to it.
Click this button to remove the file.
Instructor Notes
Notes
Enter notes for this Assignment. These notes are only viewed by
the Instructor.
Attach local file
Click Browse to select a file stored locally. Click Submit or Add
Another File to attach.
Copy file from
Content
Collection
Click Browse and select a file from the Content Collection to
add as an attachment from the Content Collection
Currently
Attached Files
Lists the files currently attached to the Instructor Notes. These
files are only viewable by the Instructor. If multiple files should
be attached, click Add Another File to add additional files.
Remove a file
Once a file has been added, a Remove button appears next to it.
Click this button to remove the file.
Copy files from the Content Collection
Users may select files stored in the Content Collection to add to different course areas, such as
Assignments, items, and Assessments. Select Browse next to Copy file from Content
Collection. A new window opens displaying the Content Collection view. Once the file has been
selected, choose Submit or Add Another File to attach the file.
When files are attached, users must select either Attach Local File or Copy File from Content
Collection. If files that are stored both locally and in the Content Collection should be submitted,
use one of the options to select a file, click Add Another File, then use the other option to select
the other files.
NOTE: The Copy File from Content Collection option is only available if the
Blackboard Content System is installed and the option has been made available
by the System Administrator.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 305 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ITEM OPTIONS: ASSIGNMENTS
Overview
When a Student submits an Assignment it will appear in the Gradebook, where Instructors can
access and grade it. The Item Options page enables Instructors to access areas where they can
grade the Assignment, view Student statistics for the Assignment and delete files associated with
Assignments.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Item Options: Assignments page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select an Assignment item in the Gradebook.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page:
F UNCTION
D ESCRIPTION
Item Grade List
View a list of Students and their grades for this Assignment.
Item Detail
View the Assignment statistics.
Item Information
Modify the Gradebook item information, such as item name and
description.
Item Download
Download Assignments submitted by Students.
Item File Clean Up
Delete files for specific Students.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 306 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
DOWNLOAD ASSIGNMENT
Overview
When a Student submits an Assignment it will appear in the Gradebook, where Instructors can
access and grade it. The Download Assignments page enables the Instructor to download Student
assignments and save them.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Download Assignment page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select an Assignment item in the Gradebook. The Item Options page will appear.
3.
Click Item Download.
Fields
The following table details the fields on this page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Students
Check All
Select this option to download the files for all of the Students on the
list who have submitted Assignments.
Check Ungraded
Select this option to select the check boxes and download the files
for those Student’s whose Assignments have not been graded.
Uncheck All
Select this option to deselect all of the check boxes.
Download Assignments
The Instructor selects the check boxes next to the Student Assignments he or she would like to
download. Individual or multiple check boxes may be selected. After Submit is selected a
Download Assignment page appears. Click the link on this page to save the exported assignments
to a location on the hard drive, where they can be accessed. The file name automatically includes
the user name of the Student who submitted the file.
For example, a file submitted by Mary Wallace (user name ‘mwallace’) for Week 1 Assignment:
Week_1_Assignment_mwallace
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 307 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
DELETE ASSIGNMENT FILES
Overview
When a Student submits an Assignment it will appear in the Gradebook where Instructors can
access and grade it. The Delete Assignment Files page enables the Instructor to delete files that
are attached to an Assignment. This includes:
•
files submitted by a Student
•
files the Instructor has included in his or her feedback on the Grade Assignment page
•
files the Instructor has included in his or her notes on the Grade Assignment page
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Delete Assignment Files page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select an Assignment item in the Gradebook. The Item Options page will appear.
3.
Click Item File Clean Up.
Fields
The following table details the fields on this page:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Students
Check All
Select this option to select and delete all files associated with an
Assignment.
Check All Student
Files
Select this option to select and delete all files submitted by a
Student for an Assignment.
Check
All
Instructor’s Files
for Students
Select this option to select and delete files sent to a Student from
an Instructor for an Assignment. These files are attached on the
Grade Assignment: Assignment Name page.
Check
All
Instructor’s
Personal Files
Select this option to delete files an Instructor attached to an
Assignment for personal notes. These files are attached on the
Grade Assignment: Assignment Name page.
Check Graded
Select this option to select and delete those files for Assignments
that have been graded.
Uncheck All
Select this option to deselect all of the check boxes.
NOTE: Single or multiple files may be selected in the left-side check boxes
by clicking Control.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 308 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Instructor Manual
Page 309 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
USER OPTIONS
Overview
Instructors can view details about a Student from the User Options page. This includes their
personal information, such as address and phone number, and statistical information about their
performance in the course.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the User Options page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Student Name on the Spreadsheet.
Functions
The table below details the functions available on this page:
F UNCTION
D ESCRIPTION
User Grade List
View a list of Students and their grades for this Assessment.
User Detail
View statistics about a Student, such as their average grade on an
Assessment.
User Information
View information about a Student, such as name and address.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 310 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
VIEW USER INFORMATION
Overview
Instructors can view Student information, such as address and phone number, on the View User
Information page.
NOTE: is an informational page. No data may be modified or deleted.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the View User Information page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Student Name on the Spreadsheet. The User Options page will appear.
3.
Select User Information.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 311 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
VIEW USER GRADES
Overview
Instructors can view all grades for an individual Student on the View User Grades page.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the View User Grades page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Student Name on the Spreadsheet. The User Options page will appear.
3.
Select User Grade List.
Function
Instructors may view and modify a Student’s grades from the View User Grades page. To modify a
grade, enter it in the box next to the date and click Submit. The Grade will be updated in the
Gradebook.
NOTE: Surveys are not graded; therefore, individual grades will not appear
on this page. A check mark will appear in place of the grade. If a user has
exceeded the time limit set for a survey, an exclamation point will be
displayed. The Instructor may enter a value in the Grade field. After the
value is entered, a check mark will be displayed for the survey.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 312 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
VIEW USER DETAIL
Overview
The View User Detail page displays the overall Gradebook statistics for an individual Student, such
as their average grade.
NOTE: This is an informational page. No data may be modified or deleted.
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the View User Detail page.
1.
Select Gradebook on the Control Panel.
2.
Select a Student Name on the Spreadsheet. The User Options page will appear.
3.
Select User Detail.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 313 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
GRADEBOOK VIEWS
Overview
Gradebook Views allows the Instructor to view the Gradebook by item or by user. This is especially
useful for locating and modifying information in courses with a great number of users and a great
number of Gradebook items.
The Gradebook Views page includes links that show the Users in the Gradebook or the Items in the
Gradebook. This is a tool for quick searching in the Gradebook.
Find this page
Click Gradebook Views from the Assessment section of the Control Panel to open this page.
Functions
The following functions are available from the Gradebook Views page.
TO . . .
CLICK
access a list of Gradebook
items
View Grades by Item
access a list of users that
appear in the Gradebook
View Grades by User
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
...
Page 314 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
VIEW GRADES BY GRADEBOOK ITEM
Overview
The View Grades by Gradebook Item page shows a list of all the items that are in the Gradebook.
Gradebook details about each item can be accessed through this page. The page also contains a
filter to make finding items easier.
Find this page
Follow these steps to find the View Grades by Item page.
1.
Click Gradebook Views on the Control Panel.
2.
Click View Grades by Item.
Features
The following features are available on the View Grades By Gradebook Item page.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
sort Items
Click the caret at the top of each column to sort the list of items by
that column. Items will appear in alphabetical order (A to Z),
chronological order (most recent to earliest), or numerical order
(greatest to least).
show only certain
items
the drop-down list, Filter Items by Category, and select a
category. Click Go to display a list of items in that category.
view details of a
particular item
the name of the item in the list. The Item Options page for that
category of item will appear.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 315 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
VIEW GRADES BY USER
Overview
The View Grades by User page shows a list of all the Users that are in the Gradebook. Gradebook
details about each User can be accessed through this page. The page also contains a filter to
make finding users easier.
Find this page
Follow these steps to find the View Grades by User page.
1.
Click Gradebook Views on the Control Panel.
2.
Click View Grades by User.
Features
The following features are available on the View Grades By User page.
TO . . .
CLICK
...
show only certain
Users
the drop-down list, Filter Users by Last Name, and select a letter.
Click Go to display a list of Users whose last name begins with that
letter.
view details of a
particular User
the name of the User in the list. The User Options page will appear.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 316 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE STATISTICS
Overview
Instructors can use the Course Statistics area to generate reports on the course usage and activity.
Instructors can view specific Student’s usage to determine if Students are actively using the
Course. The report appears in the form of graphical charts.
Please note that, when viewing reports that include hit or access statistics, a hit is tracked every
time a request is sent to the Blackboard Learning System. For example, when tracking use of the
Communication Area: a Student accesses the Communication area (1 hit), clicks Discussion
Boards (2 hits), clicks a forum (3 hits), and clicks a message to read (4 hits).
Find this page
Follow the steps below to open the Course Statistics page.
1.
Select a course you are teaching and open the Control Panel.
2.
Click Course Statistics in Assessments.
Fields
The table below details the fields on the Course Statistics page.
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Select Report Filer
Report Type
Select one of the following reports:
• Overall Summary of Usage
• Accesses by Course area
• Accesses by Groups
• Accesses by Forum
Time Period
Click Start Date and select a date to begin the report on.
Select End Date and choose a date to end the report. If End
Date is not selected the report will begin on the Start Date
and end on the current date.
Users
Select All Users to view a report containing information from
all users who have accessed the Course. Select Selected
Users to view a report for specific users. If this option is
selected, choose users in the box below to include in the
report. To choose more then one user hold down Shift or
Control.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 317 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
TOP OF FORMCHAPTER 14 – ASSISTANCE
Introduction
Assistance allows the Instructor to research the online support site, browse the online Instructor
Manual, and contact support.
Support
Support appears in the right column of the Control Panel.
Online Support
Click Support to open the Behind the Blackboard Web site in a separate browser window.
Online Instructor Manual
Click Manual to open the Instructor Manual in a separate browser window. Please note that the
online manuals are updated regularly. Check here first for help with any of the features and
functions in the Blackboard Learning System.
Contact System Administrator
Click Contact System Administrator to send email to the System Administrator at the institution
for support.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 318 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 15 - ORGANIZING AND MANAGING CONTENT
About organizing and managing content
The Content Collection allows Instructors to store, share, and publish content within personal user
folders, course folders and institution folders. This chapter explains how to organize and manage
content in ways that are beneficial to them and to other users in the system.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following topics:
T OPIC
D ESCRIPTION
Organize content in folders
Describes how content is organized within folders.
Organize folder permissions
Explains how folder permissions are managed.
Tools for sharing and finding
content
Describes tools available for searching and sharing
content.
Organize course content
Explains how to organize content and permissions
for courses.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 319 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
ORGANIZE CONTENT IN FOLDERS
About Organizing Content
Before adding any content to the Content Collection, users should plan out how they will manage
their content. This will allow them to organize content in a way which best meets their individual
needs.
Files in the Content Collection are organized in a tree structure of nested folders up to, and
including, the content area level. This means that each folder may contain other subfolders and
files. The term “items” refers to files and folders.
A folder stores both files and other folders. Folders are automatically available to the user who
added the folder but must be shared if other users are to view the folder and its contents. It is
important to remember that all folders are contained within other folders up to the root (/) folder.
Root folders are folders in which all other folders are placed. Content areas, such as Users,
Courses, Institution, and Library, are simply folders stored under the root folder.
The system does not allow subfolders with the same name in a single parent folder. For example,
two folders named Group Projects may not be created in the top-level of the username folder. The
system also does not allow files with the same name to exist in a folder.
Private content space and Public content space
Creating separate folders for personal content (private space) and folders that are available to
other users (public space) is very helpful. This method allows the user to have certain folders
available only to them, where they can store personal content. For example, one personal folder
may contain papers and projects that are in progress, while another contains professional content
that is not ready to be shared, such as resumes and cover letters for jobs. Additional permissions
for these personal folders are not granted to anyone else.
When a document is ready to be shared, it may be copied or moved to a public folder. For
example, if an Instructor is working on a course document he or she can create the draft in a
personal folder, and then move it to a shared folder when it is complete. The shared folder is
shared with all users enrolled in the class (public space that is set to be available to only course
members), and allows for collaboration.
Creating a private folder
A private folder is created in the same way as other folders in the Content Collection, through the
Add Folder option. The permissions granted on the folder determine whether or not it is private.
In the username folder, a private folder is a subfolder that is not shared with any other users. A
user may create a subfolder in his or her username folder and not grant any other users
permissions to it.
In a course folder, a private folder may be specifically for the Instructor, or it may also be accessible
by users with other course roles. For example, a private subfolder may be created with permissions
granted to the Instructor, Teaching Assistant, and Course Builder. This folder would not be
available to any Students enrolled in the course.
Creating a Public folder
Similar to private folders, public folders are created in the same way as other folders, using the
Add Folder option. The permissions granted on a folder determine whether or not it becomes to
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 320 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
multiple users and groups of users. Any user with Manage Permissions may share the item with a
wider audience.
In a username folder, a public folder may be created and shared with a group of users collaborating
on a project.
In a course folder, a public folder may be created and shared with all users enrolled in the course.
This folder would include course information or articles that the whole class needs to read.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 321 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
ORGANIZE FOLDER PERMISSIONS
Organizing Folders
It is helpful if users organize folders in a way that allows them to manage permissions by folder,
rather than by file. For example, create a folder that contains all files used in a group project. This
way the entire folder may be shared with the group members, rather than trying to manage
permissions on separate items stored in different folders.
Only Read permission should be added to a top-level folder, for example the username folder.
Anytime a Permission is added or changed on the top-level folder, check any subfolders or files
designated as Private and verify that additional permissions have not inadvertently been added that
would expose protected information.
Sharing Folders
When adding folders and files to the Content Collection, keep in mind which users and user lists
the content will be shared with. Try to create folders in which all items are to be shared with the
same users. When items shared with the same users are spread out among different folders, it may
become very difficult to manage. For example, if the user plans on creating documents that will be
applicable to all users at the institution, they should create a folder that will be shared with All
System Users, then add the specific items to this folder.
Sharing files
Files are automatically available to the user that added the file but must be shared if other users
are to view the item.
Files inherit permissions from the folder they reside in. This means that if a file is added to a folder
that already has Read and Write permission for certain users or user lists, the those same users
will also have Read and Write permission on the newly added file.
Overwrite Option on Folders
When modifying or adding permissions to a parent folder, the user has the
and subfolders to inherit these permissions. For example, if the Read and
added to the folder, and an item within the folder has Read, Write, and
Remove permissions would be removed from the file. All subfolders and
folder would be granted Read and Write permissions.
option to force all files
Write permissions are
Remove permissions,
files within the parent
If this option is not selected, the files and subfolders are automatically granted any additional
permission given to the parent folder, but existing permissions are not removed. For example, if
Read, Write and Manage permissions are added to the folder, and an item within the folder has
Read, Write, and Remove permissions, the permissions for the file would remain Read, Write and
Remove, and Manage would be added.
After modifying permissions on a folder, the user may modify the permissions on an item, but these
will be overwritten the next time permissions on the parent folder are modified. This is one reason
storing items with the same purpose and audience in a single folder makes managing permissions
much easier.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 322 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
TOOLS FOR SHARING AND FINDING CONTENT
About Tools for sharing and finding content
A number of tools are available to facilitate sharing content and searching for content that has been
shared. These options are dependent on the level of the folder shared, for example granting
permission on a top-level folder versus a subfolder. Remember that when a folder is shared,
permissions are granted to all content in the folder.
Find Folder
The Find Folder option allows users to search for top-level folders they have permissions to, for
example if another user has granted him or her Read permission on a username folder. When a
user is granted permissions to a top-level folder, the Find Folder option allows the user to locate the
folder and add it to his or her Content Collection menu, making is easy to access the folder on a
regular basis.
Users may decide to share a top-level folder with another user, and then adjust the permissions on
the content within, limiting the content this user may access. For example, grant the user Read
permission on the username folder. Then open the folder and remove Read permission for the
content this user should not view. The user may still use the Find Folder option, but they will only
view specific content in the folder.
Search
Search allows users to locate all files and folders that have been shared with them. When a search
is performed only those items to which a user has permissions will be returned. If permissions are
granted on a nested folder (and not the top-level folder) the user may search for the folder and
bookmark it; the Find Folder option may not be used on nested folders.
Go To Location
Go to Location allows users to go directly to a specific folder that has been shared with them in the
Content Collection. This time-saver allows users to enter the path to open a folder and Bookmark
the location at the same time.
Bookmarks
Bookmarks enable quick access to frequently used content a without having to navigate through
several folders. Bookmarks can be organized into folders and subfolders as needed by the user.
This tool is helpful when permissions are granted on a nested folder, since the Find Folder tool may
not be used.
Workflow Activities
If a user is expected to take action or respond to an item, it is helpful to send a Workflow Activity
with the item. When a Workflow Activity is created users are selected to share the item with and
permissions are granted. An option may also be selected to send an email to these users stating
that this item has been shared with them and that a Workflow Activity is attached to it.
Passes
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 323 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Passes may be used to share a file with a user for a specific amount of time. This is especially
useful for sharing files with users who do not have system accounts. When a pass is created, the
user decides whether to grant Read or Read and Write permission to the file with the pass. When
the time allotted for the pass is over, the user will no longer be able to access the file.
Portfolios
Portfolios allow users to collect and organize files into custom Web pages. These Portfolios can
then be presented to individuals and groups of users. It is important that users consider the
permissions granted to files that are linked to in a Portfolio. If another user has permissions (other
than Read) to a file that is linked to a Portfolio, the file may be modified or removed, resulting in
issues for the Portfolio users.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 324 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ORGANIZE COURSE FOLDERS
About course folders
A course folder for each course appears by default under Courses. The default roles that have full
permissions (Read, Write, Manage, and Remove) to this folder when the folder is first created are
Instructors, Teaching Assistants and Course Builders. The Administrator may modify this default.
For example, the Administrator may set it so that when a Course folder is first created, only
Instructors and TAs have full permissions. It is very important to understand which permissions
have been granted to the folder before proceeding with setting up subfolders and additional
permissions.
Any user with Manage permission on the course folder can grant additional permissions on that
folder to other users. An Instructor may want to grant Read permission to all Students in the course
to the course folder, and Read and Write permission to a public folder created beneath the main
course folder.
Storing single course content
The temporary nature of courses makes the course folder (tied to the Course ID) useful for storing
content that is specific to a single course. If a course is removed, the folder tied to the Course ID is
no longer accessible. If content that is stored in the course folder does need to be reused, options
for copying and moving items are available.
It may be easier to store content that is used in multiple courses in the institution folder or the
instructor’s user folder. This also depends on how the Administrator configures the Institution folder
and its availability. Keep in mind that if course-related content is stored in a user folder, and it has
not been shared. This content will be unavailable if the user leaves the institution and is removed
from the system.
Folder examples
Subfolders within the course folder may be used to store both private and public content. The
following are some examples of folders that may be created in the course folder:
Private Folder
A folder shared with the Instructor, Teaching Assistant, and other applicable course roles that
contain private course information, such as test and survey results. These users all have Read,
Write, Manage and Remove permission on the folder.
NOTE: The Instructor may decide to retain the course folder as a
workspace for the course, and not allow users to access any items in the
course folder. Instead, the Instructor may link to Content Collection items
from the course. In this scenario, the entire course folder would be a
private folder.
Group Folders
Folders shared with course groups, which may be used as group collaboration areas. There are a
few options for setting this up:
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 325 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Grant all Students in the course Read access on the top-level course folder. Remove Read
permission for Students to all private folders. Add permissions for each group to their respective
Group folder. This option allows Students to use the Find Folder tool to locate the Group folder.
Grant each course Group permission to their respective Group folder in the course (do not grant
any permission for course users to the top-level course folder). The Students may use Search, Go
To Location, and Bookmarks to locate the folder.
Public Folder
Folder shared with all course users where they may access course related materials, such as the
syllabus or reading list. There are a few options for setting this up:
•
Grant all Students in the course Read access on the top-level course folder. Remove
Read permission for Students to all private folders. Add permissions for all course users to
the public folder. This option allows Students to use the Find Folder tool to locate the
public folder.
•
Grant all course users permissions to the public folder (do not grant any permission for
course users to the top-level course folder). The Students may use Search, Go To
Location, and Bookmarks to locate the public folder.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 326 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 16—USING CONTENT SYSTEM CONTENT
Introduction
Instructors may use items from the Content Collection throughout courses in the Blackboard
Learning System. Files and Portfolios may be linked to from different areas in a course and items
from a course may be added to a folder in the Content Collection.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following sections:
S ECTION
D ESCRIPTION
Add Content
Collection Items to a
Course
Explains how to add items from the Content Collection to a
course.
Add Portfolios to a
Course
Explains how to add Portfolios to a course.
Course Link Checker
Describes how to check permissions for Content Collection items
linked to in a course.
Copy files to the
Content Collection
Explains how to copy files from a course to the Content
Collection.
Content Collection
Items during
Export/Import and
Archive/Restore
Explains how Content Collection items behave when a course
package is imported or restored.
Course Copy and
Content Collection
Items
Explains how Content Collection items function during a course
copy.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 327 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD CONTENT SYSTEM ITEMS TO A COURSE
Overview
It is easy for Instructors to quickly add materials stored in the Content Collection to their Blackboard
Learning System courses. Content Collection items are supported as another type of content, such
as Learning Units, that can be added to a course.
Instructors have two options for adding items from the Content Collection to a course. Items may
be added through the Add Content Collection Content option available in Content Areas, or through
the third row action buttons available in the Text Box Editor.
NOTE: The System Administrator may disable the Text Box Editor. The third row
action buttons will not be available if this feature is disabled.
Adding Content System Content to a course
Content Collection Content may be added to any Content Area in a course, such as Course
Information or Course Documents. To add an item from the Content Collection to a Content Area,
follow the steps below:
1.
Open the Control Panel for a course.
2.
Open a Content Area, such as Course Documents.
3.
Select Content System Content from the drop-down list in the action bar and click Go.
Complete the Add Content Collection Content page with the following information:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Content Information
Name
Enter a title for the content item. This title will appear in the course.
Color
Specify the color of the text.
Text
Enter a description for the Content item. Users have the option to
use the Text Box Editor features to format their text.
Choose Content System Item or Folder
Content
Enter the path to the content item or click Browse to search the
Content Collection and select a file.
Name of Link to
Content
Enter the name of the link that Users click to access the attached
file.
Browse
System
Options
Make the content
visible?
Select Yes to make the content available to Students immediately.
Select No to hide the content from Students. If availability is
controlled by date limits, select Yes in this field.
Launch
Select Yes to launch to open this item in a new window. Select No
link
in
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 328 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
new window?
to open the item in the existing browser window.
Track number of
views?
Select Yes to include this item in reports on Student views. Select
No and information about which Students have viewed the content
will not be tracked.
Add metadata?
Select Yes to add metadata to the item. Metadata is information
related to the item. In the Blackboard Learning System, metadata
is primarily used to ensure compliance with industry standards.
Select No if you do not wish to add metadata.
Dates Available
Select Display After and use the drop-down lists to select a date.
This will hide the content until the date selected.
Select Display Until and use the drop-down lists to enter a date.
This will hide the content after the date selected.
The Display After and Display Until features can be combined to
set restrictions to display content for a set period of time.
Adding a link to a Content System item from the Text Box Editor
Users may add links to items in the Content Collection from the Text Box Editor. Follow the steps
below to add a link to a Content Collection item:
1.
Open the Control Panel for a course.
2.
Open a course area meant to hold content where the Text Box Editor is available, such as
an Announcement or a Discussion Board.
3.
Select an option in the third row of the Text Box Editor.
The Content Collection item to link to is selected on the page that appears. Select Browse next to
the Link from Content Collection field. The Content Collection will open in a new window. Locate
the Content Collection item, select it and click Submit.
It is very important that the Browse field and the Specify URL field are left blank. These fields are
not used for adding items from the Blackboard Content Collection.
Depending on the type of item being added, additional options may also be available on this page.
For more information, see the Text Box Editor topic in this manual.
NOTE: The System Administrator may disable the Text Box Editor Links.
The third row action buttons will not be available if this feature is disabled.
Permission granted to items added to Courses
When an item from the Content Collection is added to a course, all users in the course will
automatically be granted Read permission to the item. The Permissions page for the item in the
Content Collection will list All Course Users as having Read permission.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 329 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD PORTFOLIOS TO A COURSE
Overview
It is easy for Instructors to quickly add Portfolios stored in the Content Collection to their
Blackboard Learning System courses. These Portfolios may be viewed by all users enrolled in the
course.
NOTE: The System Administrator may disable Portfolios. This option will
not be available within courses if this tool is disabled.
Sharing a Portfolio with a course
1.
Portfolios created in the Content Collection may be shared with users in a Blackboard
Learning System course. To share a Portfolio with a course, follow the steps below:
2.
Select folder view for the Content Collection menu.
3.
Under the heading Portfolios, click My Portfolios.
4.
Select Manage next to the Portfolio to share with the course.
5.
Click Share Portfolio.
6.
Select Share with Course from the drop-down list in the Action Bar and click Go.
7.
Enter the Course ID of the course. The Portfolio may be shared with multiple courses;
separate each Course ID with a comma.
8.
A receipt page appears stating which courses were granted access to the Portfolio.
Once a Portfolio is shared, it must be made available in the course before it may be accessed by
users.
Make Portfolios available to users in a course
Portfolios are made available to users in a course through the Course Menu. Before adding
Portfolios to the Course Menu, the Instructor must enable Portfolios in the course. Follow the steps
below:
1.
Select Manage Tools under Course Options on the Control Panel.
2.
Select Enable Blackboard Tools.
3.
Select the Availability option next to Portfolios.
4.
Return to the Control Panel.
5.
Select Manage Course Menu under Course Options.
6.
Select Add Tool Area.
7.
Select Portfolio in the Area Type drop-down list and enter a name for the area (for
example, Course Portfolios) in the Area name field. Select the option Make available for
Student/Participant users.
A Course Portfolio area will appear in the Course Menu. Users may view Portfolios that have been
shared with the course in this area.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 330 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
Location of Portfolios within Control Panel
All Portfolios that have been shared with a course are located on the Course Portfolios page.
Follow these steps to open the Course Portfolios page.
1.
Open the Control Panel for a Blackboard Learning System course.
2.
Select Course Portfolios under Course Tools.
3.
Select the title of a Portfolio to open and view it.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 331 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE LINK CHECKER
Overview
The Course Link Checker allows Instructors to check the links to Content Collection items that have
been added to a course. For example, if an item in the Content Collection is removed after the
Instructor has created a link to the item in a course, the Course Link Checker will detect this and
make the Instructor aware of the broken link. Depending on the situation, some broken links may
be repaired; while others may not.
When a link to a Content Collection item is added to a course, All Course Users are given Read
permission to this item in the Content Collection. When the Course Link Checker is run, the only
permission that is checked is Read permission for All Course Users.
Enabling the Course Link Checker
Instructors have the option of enabling or disabling the Course Link Checker for each of their
courses. The tool is disabled by default when a course is created. The following steps explain how
to enable the Course Link Checker:
1.
Open the Control Panel for a Blackboard Learning System course.
2.
Select Manage Tools under Course Tools.
3.
Select Enable Blackboard Tools.
4.
Select the check box under Available for Check CS Links and click Submit.
NOTE: The System Administrator may disable the Course Link Checker for
the entire system. This tool will not be available within courses if it is
disabled by the Administrator.
Course areas checked by the Course Link Checker
Items may be added to courses through the Add Content Collection option available in Content
Areas, or through the third row action buttons available in the Text Box Editor. The Course Link
Checker will detect any broken links that appear for content added through the Add Content
Collection option.
The Course Link Checker will detect any broken links added to the following areas through the Text
Box Editor:
•
Content Areas (for example, Course Documents, Course Information, and Assignments)
•
Announcements, Calendar Events and Tasks
•
Learning Units
•
Discussion Boards
NOTE: Links to Content Collection items added to Assessments (including
Tests, Surveys and Questions Pools) are not checked by the Course Link
Checker.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 332 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Instructor Manual
Page 333 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
When to use the Course Link Checker
If links to Content Collection items are added to a course, it is important that the Course Link
Checker is run on a periodic basis. This is especially true after a course is copied, restored or
imported. Users with access to the items in the Content Collection may move and remove items, or
modify the permissions on an item. These actions may impact the validity of a link to the item in a
course.
For example, when a link to a Content Collection item is added to a course, all course users are
automatically granted Read permission to the item in the Content Collection. If this permission is
later removed by a user who has Manage permission to the item, selecting the link within the
course will result in an error message.
Steps to use the Course Link Checker
Running the Course Link Checker is a very simple operation.
1.
Open the Control Panel, and select Check CS Links under Course Tools.
2.
Select Submit on the Course Link Checker page. This operation may take a few minutes
to run; the length of the process depends on the number of links within a course.
3.
Read the results and repair broken links
4.
After the Course Link Checker is run, a results page will appear, explaining the status of
each link to a Content Collection item. Some broken links may be fixed by the Instructor,
while others may not.
L EGEND
D ESCRIPTION
AND
R ESOLUTION
Valid Link. These items are linked successfully and do not require any further
action.
Repairable permissions error. All Course Users do not have Read permission
to these Content Collection items. When a user attempts to access this link in a
course, a ‘File Not Found’ error will appear. The Instructor has Manage
permission to the items and can therefore repair these links. Select the check
boxes next to these items and click Repair. The system will grant Read
permission to these items to All Course Users.
Path not found. The items have been moved, removed or renamed within the
Content Collection. The links are broken and the Instructor should remove them
from the course. If the new locations or names of the items are known, new
links may be created.
Permissions error. The links to the items are valid but All Course Users do not
have Read permission to these Content Collection items. The Instructor does
not have Manage permission to the items and cannot repair these links. The
Instructor should remove these links from the course or contact a user with
Manage permissions to these items to add the appropriate permission.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 334 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COPY FILES TO THE CONTENT COLLECTION
Overview
The Copy Files to CS tool enables Instructors to copy content from their courses in the Blackboard
Learning System to a folder in the Content Collection. This is very helpful for Instructors who have
attached files that exist outside of the Content Collection to course Content Areas. Items that are
added through to the Content Collection may be used in new courses, shared with other users, and
added to Portfolios.
This tool is meant for adding new content to the Content Collection; it does not detect Content
Collection items that have been added to a course or make changes to the course itself.
NOTE: The System Administrator may disable the Copy Files to CS tool. This
tool will not be available if it is disabled by the Administrator.
Types of content that may be copied
The Copy Files to CS tool copies files that have been attached to course Content Areas. These
files are originally added the course through the File to Attach option available on specific pages in
the application or the third row action buttons in the Text Box Editor.
The Copy Files to CS tool copies items attached to the following:
•
Content folders
•
Content items
•
Course links
•
Assignments
•
Instructions
•
External links
•
Learning units
NOTE: All attachments associated with unprotected course cartridges are
copied; protected cartridge content will not be copied.
Types of content that are not copied
Attachments added to the following areas of a course are NOT added to the Content Collection
through the Copy files to CS tool:
•
Attachments added to any Assessment areas (this includes Tests, Surveys and Question
Pools)
•
Attachments added to Discussion Board messages, including Group Discussion Board
messages
•
Files uploaded to the Digital Drop Box by Instructors
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 335 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
•
Items added to the Grade Assignment page by the Instructor are not copied. These items
include comments for a specific user and are sent when the Assignment is graded. (Items
added to the Add Assignment page by an Instructor are copied)
Student files added to a course are also not copied, this includes:
•
Files uploaded to the Digital Drop Box by users
•
Files uploaded by users to Assignments
Enabling Copy Files to CS
Instructors have the option of enabling or disabling the Copy Files to CS tool for each of their
courses. The tool is disabled by default when a course is created. Follow the steps below to enable
the Course Link Checker:
•
Open the Control Panel for a course.
•
Select Manage Tools under Course Tools.
•
Select Enable Blackboard Tools.
•
Select the check box under Available for Copy Files to CS and click Submit.
NOTE: The System Administrator may disable the Copy Files to CS for the
entire system. This tool will not be available within courses if it is disabled
by the Administrator.
Using Copy Files to CS
Instructors access the Copy Files to CS tool within the Control Panel of a course.
Follow the steps below to run the Copy Files to CS Tool:
1.
Open the Control Panel, and select Copy Files to CS under Course Tools. The Copy
Files to CS page appears.
2.
In the Select Course Materials, select the check boxes for those areas that will be copied.
In each area selected, attached items will be copied to the Content Collection.
3.
The path in the Destination field defaults to the location of the course folder in Course
Content in the Content Collection. The path to a different folder may be entered.
NOTE: Users can only copy content to folders within the Content Collection
to which they have Write permission.
4.
A receipt page appears after the copy is complete. The receipt states all areas that were
successfully copied and any that have failed.
5.
The copied items will appear in the Content Collection in a folder named Copied Content.
Run the tool multiple times
The Copy Files to CS tool may be run on the same course multiple times. This may be helpful in
the following situations:
•
Too much or too little content was selected to copy and a clean copy is needed.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 336 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
•
If files were copied at the beginning of the term, the process may need to be run at the
end of the term to copy additional files that have been uploaded.
Each time this tool is run, a new set of folders appears in the Content Collection. If the content is
copied to the same area, for example Course Content, the Copied Content folder is appended with
the number of the copy. For example, the folder created after the tool is run a second time is
named ‘Course ID’ Copied Content (2).
File Structure in the Content Collection
All files copied to the Content Collection are stored in the destination folder selected on the Select
Areas to Copy page. All of the content from the course is stored in a folder with the following
naming convention: ‘Course ID’ Copied Content. The structure of files within Copied Content
mimics the structure of the files in the course.
Example
The copy from History100 included Course Documents and Course Information.
Course Documents folder contained:
•
A course item with the file Syllabus.doc attached
•
A course folder named Chapter One (no items attached to the folder)
•
In the Chapter One folder - A course item with the file WeekOne.doc attached
Course Information folder contained:
A course item with the file CourseOverview.doc attached. The structure of files within the Content
Collection will be as follows:
>History 100 folder
>History100 Copied Content folder
>Course Documents folder
>Syllabus.doc
>Chapter One folder
>WeekOne.doc
>Course Information folder
>CourseOverview.doc
Copying special file attachments
There are a few cases where copied content receives special treatment in the Content Collection:
Content uploaded to the Blackboard Learning System as package files (for example, zip files)
where the user selected to unpackage this file are copied to the Content Collection in the zip file
format with the unpackaged items under a folder with the following format:
dir_fileattachmentname.fileextension. For example, a file called “unzipme.zip” is unpackaged at
the root of the Course Information folder. The Content Collection will have both the unpackage.zip
file at the root of the Course Information folder and also dir_unzipme.zip that contains the contents
of the original file.
All files uploaded through the Text Box Editor are copied to individual subfolders named
embedded(unique#). This is also true for files uploaded through the Text field when the Text Box
Editor is not available.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 337 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
When an HTML file that contains refrences to images is uploaded, the user is prompted to upload
the images. These are “missing images”. Missing images are copied to a folder with the following
format: dir_fileattachmentname.fileextension.
Copying files with the same name
The Content Collection does not allow a folder to contain multiple files with the same name; this
type of duplication is permitted within courses in the Blackboard Learning System. The same is true
of folders with the same name.
When files and folders with the same name are copied to the same folder in the Content Collection,
the names will be appended with a number. For example, if two files named Syllabus.doc are
copied to the same folder, they will appear as Syllabus.doc and Syllabus1.doc.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 338 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CONTENT SYSTEM ITEMS DURING EXPORT/IMPORT AND ARCHIVE/RESTORE
Overview
When a course in the Blackboard Learning System is exported or archived, links to any Content
Collection files are included. If a package is then imported or restored, these links are included in
the content. The behavior of these links depends on the state of the items in the Content Collection.
Items remain in the Content Collection
If the items are stored in the same location within the Content Collection, the links to these items in
the course will function properly. The Instructor should check the permissions for these items as
they may need to be updated. Permissions for this item should be granted to the Course User List
so all users enrolled in the course may access the items. If users do not have permissions to the
item, an ‘Access Denied’ error message appears when they select the link.
Items restored or imported to a course without Content Collection installed
If a course package is restored or imported to a course in the Blackboard Learning System and the
Content Collection is not installed, all of the links to Content Collection items in the imported or
restored course will be broken. This is due to the fact that the course saves a link to each item, not
the actual files.
The Instructor should remove the links to these items from the course. If the items are accessible,
they can be added to the Content Collection and linked to again from the course.
NOTE: If the Content Collection is moved or deleted the same behavior
described above will occur. All of the links to Content Collection items will
be broken.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 339 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
COURSE COPY AND CONTENT SYSTEM ITEMS
Overview
Links to Content Collection items in a course are copied during a course copy operation. Because
links to Content Collection items are copied and not physical files, all users must have permission
within the Content Collection to view these files. Users in the new course will not have the
appropriate permission. When a user without the appropriate permission to the Content Collection
item selects a link to the item in the course, an Access Denied message appears.
The Instructor must add permission for these users to the item in the Content Collection or the
Administrator may enable the Copy Settings options to automatically update permissions when a
course is copied.
NOTE: The automatic permissions update only applies to courses that are
copied. If a course is imported or restored, user permissions to Content
Collection items linked to in the course are not automatically
updated.above will occur. All of the links to Content Collection items will be
broken.
Automatic permission updates to Content Collection items
A Copy Settings option is available for Administrators to manage the permissions of Content
Collection items that are copied as part of a course copy operation. There are two options the
Administrator may enable in the system; one or both may be enabled. If these options are enabled,
the permissions for Content Collection items located in almost all course areas will be automatically
updated.
•
Update permissions for general links – If this option is selected, all users enrolled in a
copied course automatically receive Read permission to Content Collection items linked to
in the course.
•
Update permissions for e-Reserve links - If this option is selected, all users in a copied
course automatically receive Read permission to e-Reserves items linked to in the course.
NOTE: The one exception to this is Assessments. The permissions for
Content Collection items linked to in Tests, Surveys, and Questions Pools
are not automatically updated. The Instructor must update the permissions
to these items manually through the Content Collection.
Item permissions in the Content Collection
When a Content Collection item is copied through course copy and the permissions are
automatically updated, the new permissions are visible for the item in the Content Collection. When
the Content Collection item is viewed in the Content Collection, Read permission will appear for All
Course Users.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 340 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
CHAPTER 17 - USING LIBRARY CONTENT
About the Library
Instructors can enhance their courses by adding content from the Library. The Library is used to
post eReserves, electronic manuscripts, and other institution resources. It allows seamless
integration with the Blackboard Learning System, making it a powerful way to share and distribute
library materials. This document explains how Instructors can use the library to supplement their
course offerings.
In this chapter
This chapter includes information on the following topics:
T OPIC
D ESCRIPTION
Library areas
Describes the main areas of the Library.
eReserve folders
Explains how eReserve course folders are created
and their availability.
Add Library content to courses
Describes how to add content from the Library to a
course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 341 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
LIBRARY AREAS
About Library Areas
By default, there are two main areas within the Library, Library Content and eReserves. Additional
areas may also be added to the Library to meet specific institution needs.
Library Content
Library Content may be organized according to the institution’s needs. This area is intended for
content that may be shared across the entire institution.
User access to Library Content
All users have read access to all content within Library Content by default.
Instructor access to Library Content
Instructors may add items from Library Content to courses within the Blackboard Learning System.
eReserves
eReserves are automatically organized by course; each course in the Blackboard Learning System
has a corresponding course in eReserves. eReserves are only available for courses; eReserves
are not available for organizations.
User access to eReserves
All users have automatic read access to eReserves for courses they are enrolled in; eReserve
folders for other courses do not appear in the file tree.
Instructor access to eReserves
Instructors may add items from eReserves to courses within the Blackboard Learning System
NOTE: eReserves must be enabled by the System Administrator; if the
Administrator does not activate this area it will not appear in the Library.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 342 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Blackboard Academic Suite
Instructor Manual
ERESERVE FOLDERS
Generating course folders in eReserves
Course folders within eReserves are automatically generated the first time the Instructor, Teaching
Assistant or Course Builder accesses the Content Collection after the course is created. If a course
is added to the Blackboard Learning System, the eReserve course folder will appear to course
users the first time the Instructor accesses the Content Collection.
Course availability and eReserves
The ability to see the course’s eReserve folder when the course is made unavailable depends on
the user’s course role. Instructors, Course Builders, and Teaching Assistants can see the folder
whether the course is available or unavailable. Students can only see the eReserve course folder
when the course is available.
Course removal and eReserves
If a course is removed from the Blackboard Learning System, the eReserve folder, and all of its
content, is also removed.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 343 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
ADD LIBRARY CONTENT TO COURSES
Add content from the Library to a course
Instructors may add items from the Library to their course Content Areas. This includes items that
appear in their course folders within eReserves, as well as items from Library Content. Follow the
steps below to add an item from the Library to a course:
1.
Select a course and open the Course Control Panel.
2.
Select a Content Area, such as Course Documents. The Course Documents page will
appear.
3.
Select Add Content System Content from the drop-down list in the action bar and click
Go. The Add Content Collection Content page will appear.
4.
Complete the Add Content Collection Content page with the following information:
F IELD
D ESCRIPTION
Content Information
Name
Enter a title for the content item. This title will appear in the course.
Text
Enter a description for the Content item. You may use the Test Box
Editor options to format the text.
Choose Content System Item or Folder
Content
Enter the path to the content item in the Library or click Browse to
locate and select the file in a folder within the Library (for example,
Library Content or eReserves).
Name of Link to
Content
Enter the name of the link that users select to access the attached
file.
Browse
System
Options
Do you want to
make the content
visible
Select Yes to make the content available to Students immediately.
Select No to hide the content from Students. If availability is
controlled by date limits, select Yes in this field.
Do you want to
track views
Select Yes to include this item in reports on Student views. Select
No and information about which Students have viewed the content
will not be tracked.
Do you want to
add metadata?
Select Yes to add metadata to the item. Metadata is information
related to the item. In the Blackboard Learning System, metadata is
primarily used to ensure compliance with industry standards. Select
No if you do not wish to add metadata.
Choose
restrictions
Select Display After and use the drop-down lists to select a date.
This will hide the content until the date selected.
date
Select Display Until and use the drop-down lists to enter a date.
This will hide the content after the date selected.
The Display After and Display Until features can be combined to
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 344 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Instructor Manual
Blackboard Academic Suite
set restrictions for the display the content for a set period of time.
Instructors also have the option of adding items in the Content Collection to courses through the
Text Box Editor. The Add Item option in the third row action bar of Text Box Editor may be used to
locate and add items in the Content Collection.
NOTE: Only items within the eReserve course folder that correspond with
that course may be added to the course. Content in eReserve course
folders for other courses you may be teaching may not be added. All items
within Library Content are available to use within a course.
© 2005 Blackboard Inc. Proprietary and Confidential
Page 345 of 345
Disclaimer: This file is provided as a convenience and not in replacement of the official Documentation, as such term is
defined in your license agreement. The official Documentation may be found in PDF Format in the Reference Center on
Behind the Blackboard (http://behind.blackboard.com). Be advised that use of this file is subject to the confidentiality
provisions of your license agreement.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement